2007 ram powerwagon owners manual

8/8/2019 2007 Ram PowerWagon Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2007-ram-powerwagon-owners-manual 1/491

2 0 0 7 O W N E

2 0 07

P OWER

WA G ON



TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 STARTING AN D OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 WHAT TO D O IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTAN CE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Van Conversions/ Campers .

Vehicle Identification Numbe

Vehicle Modifications / Alter



INTRODUCTIONThis manual has been prepared with the assistance of

service and engineering specialists to acquaint you withthe operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is

supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and

various customer oriented d ocuments. You are u rged to

read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-

tions and recommendations in this manual will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored

in the vehicle fo r convenient reference and remain w iththe vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be

aware of all safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your dealer

knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-

cians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested in

your satisfaction.

WARNIN

Engine exhaust, some of its covehicle components contaiknow n to the State o f Califorbirth defe cts or other reproducertain fluids contained in vehucts of component wear contknow n to the State o f Califorbirth defects or other reprodu

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAConsult the table of contents to

contains the information you de

The detailed ind ex, at the rear o

complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table f

symbols that may be used on yo

4 INTRODUCTION



WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis manu al contains WARNINGS against operating

procedures which could result in an accident or bodilyinjury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures

which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do

not read this entire manual you may miss important

information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERSThe Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body

modifications or special equipment installed by van

conversion/ camper manu facturers/ body builders. See

the Warranty information book, Section 2.1.C. Such

equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,

stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and

service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-

turer.

Operating instructions for the

stalled by the conversion/ cam

also be supplied with your vehiare missing, please contact you

tance in obtaining replaceme

app licable man ufacturer.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NThe vehicle identification numb

left front corner of the instrume

the windshield. This number a

mobile Information Disclosure L

on your vehicle, the vehicle reg

6 INTRODUCTION



NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS /

WARNIN

Any modifications or altera

could seriously affect its road

and may lead to an acciden

injury or death.

Vehicle Identification Number



THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOU

CONTENTS

Power Wagon: Things To Know Before Starting

Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . .12▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Steering Wheel Lock — If Eq

▫ If You Wish To Manually L

Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ To Release The Steering W▫ Automatic Transmission Ig

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sentry Key — If Equipped .

▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . .

▫ Customer Key Programmin



Security Alarm System — If Equipp ed . . . . . . . . .18

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . .20

Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .20

▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Remote Starting System — Gas Engine Only . . . .24

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . .

▫ Power Door Locks — If Eq

▫ Child Protection Door Lock

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Power Windows—If Equip

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . .

Occup ant Restraints . . . . . .

▫ Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . .

▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder

▫ Autom atic Locking Restrai

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . .

▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . .

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE



▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .45

▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .45

▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR

▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . .

Engine Break-In Recommend

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA



POWER WAGON: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORESTARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Your Power Wagon is a sp ecialty veh icle, equipp ed withseveral features not av ailable on other prod uction trucks.

It is very important that you read the following sections

of the owner’s manual before operation.

Features(See p age 78 for more information.)

Instrument Panel and Controls(See p age 171 for more information.)

Operation(See p age 264 for more information.)

Emergencies(See p age 366 for more information.)

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYThe dealer that sold you your

code nu mbers for your vehicle lbe used to order duplicate key

your dealer for these numbers

place.

Ignition K




Ignition Key Removal

Automatic Transmission

Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to

the LOCK position, and remove the key.

NOTE: If you try to remove the

lever in PARK, the key m ay bec

in the ign ition cylind er. If this ocright slightly, then remove the

malfunction occurs, the system

ignition cylinder to warn you t

inoperable. The engine can be

the key cannot be removed unti

NOTE: The p ower window

sunroof (if equipped), and po

active for 10 minutes after the off. Opening either front door w

Ignition Switch Positions




WARNING!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leavingchildren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in

the ignition. A child could operate power w indows,

other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove key from the ignition and lock all doors

when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Manual Transmission—If Eq

When the steering wheel is in

steering and ignition systemsantitheft protection for your veh

turn the key from the LOCK po

vehicle. Move the steering wh

turning the key until it turns ea

depress and hold the release bu

ignition switch and the instrum

tion key to LOCK and remove t




Locking Doors With The KeyYou can insert the key w ith either side up. To lock the

door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the

key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock

lubrication.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK —Your vehicle may be equipped

wh eel lock. This lock prevents sout the ignition key. If the stee

more than 1/ 2 turn in either dir

in the ignition switch, the steer

If You Wish To Manually LocWheel:With the engine ru nning, turn t

down , turn off the engine and

steering wheel slightly in eitheengages.

To Release The Steering WhInsert the key in the ignition sw

If the key is difficult to turn, m

the right or left to disengage th

Ignition Switch Positions




NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage

the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to

disengage it. If you tu rned the w heel to the left to engagethe lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.

Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock SystemThis system p revents the key from being removed u nless

the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of

PARK u nless the key is in the ON positions, and the

brake pedal is depressed.

SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPEDThe Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-

rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded

electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unau thorized

vehicle op eration. Therefore,

grammed to the vehicle can be

the vehicle. The system will shuseconds if someone uses an

engine.

NOTE: A key, which has not b

considered an invalid key eve

ignition lock cylinder for that v

During normal operation, after

switch, the Vehicle Security Al

turn on for three (3) second s for

remains on after the bulb check

a problem with the electronics

begins to flash after the bulb

someone u sed an invalid key to

these conditions will result in t

after two (2) seconds.




If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on

du ring n ormal vehicle operation (vehicle runn ing for

longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault inthe electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-

viced as soon as possible.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once

a Sentry Key has been p rogramm ed to a vehicle, it cannot

be programmed to any other vehicle.

At the time of pu rchase, the original owner is provided

with a four digit PIN. This number is required for dealer

replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be per-

formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer

Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of

programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A

blank key is one which has never been programmed and

needs to be cut.

NOTE: When having the Sent

bring all vehicle keys to the dea

Customer Key ProgrammingYou can p rogram n ew keys to th

valid keys by doing the followi

1. Cut the ad ditional Sentry Key

match the ignition switch lock

2. Insert the first valid key into

turn the ignition switch ON for

longer than 15 seconds. Turn theremove the first key.

3. Insert the second valid ke

switch ON within 15 seconds. A

will sound and the Vehicle The

will begin to flash. Turn the i

remove the second key.




4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and

turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10

second s a single chime w ill soun d and the Vehicle TheftAlarm Indicator Light will stop flashing, turn on again

for 3 seconds, and then turn off.

The new Sentry Key has been programmed. The Keyless

Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this

procedure. Repeat this procedure to program up to a

total of 8 keys. If you do not have a p rogrammed sentry

key, contact your dealer for details.

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to

have all r em aining keys erased fr om t he s ys tem s

memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your

vehicle. The r em aining keys m us t t hen be r epr o-

gramm ed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the d ealer at

the time of service to be reprogrammed.

General InformationThe Sentry Key system complie

and with RSS-210 of Industrsubject to the following conditi

• This device may not cause ha

• This device must accept any

received, including interferen

ired operation.

SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM

This system monitors the vehicun auth orized operation. When t

system provides both audible an

first 3 minutes the horn will s

and security telltale will flash

tional 15 minutes only the headl

will flash. The engine will run o

is used to start the vehicle. Us




Rearming of the System:The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi-

tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing,if the system has not been disabled. If the condition

wh ich initiated the alarm is still present, the system w ill

ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors

and ignition.

To Set the Alarm:The alarm w ill set wh en you u se the power d oor locks, or

use th e Keyless Entry transm itter to lock the doors. After

all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITYlight inthe instrum ent cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the

system is arming. The security light in the instrument

panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to

indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,

the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate

that the system is armed.

NOTE: If the SECURITY ligh

du ring vehicle operation, have

your dealer.To Disarm the System:Use the Keyless Entry transmit

something has triggered the sys

horn w ill sound three times wh

and the security lamp will flash

vehicle for tampering.

The Security system will also

started with a programmed Sgramm ed Sentry Key is used to

will run for 2 second s and then

initiated. To exit alarming mo

Unlock button, or start the veh

Sentry Key.




The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your

vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the

system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in thevehicle and lock the doors with th e transm itter, the alarm

will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. The

door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPEDThe courtesy lights will turn on wh en you use the keyless

entry transmitter or open the doors. This feature is only

available if you have Remote Keyless Entry.

The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they

will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is

turned on.

NOTE:

• The front courtesy overhead console, d oor courtesy

lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the

interior lights ON position (extreme top position).

• The illuminated entry system

dimmer control is in the “de

down ward position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

This system allows you to lock

Three Button Tr




radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at

the vehicle to activate the system.

To unlock the doors:Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob

once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock

all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the

illuminated entry will initiate, the parking lights will

flash on twice and if installed, the cargo lamp will turn on

for 30 seconds.

The system can be p rogramm ed to u nlock all the doors or

drivers door only upon the first UNLOCK button pressby using the following procedure:

1. Perform this operation while standing outside the

vehicle.

2. Press and hold the LOCK button on your key fob.

3. Continue to hold the LOCK b

but no longer than 10 seconds,

UNLOCK button while still ho4. Release both buttons at the s

5. This will allow you to unlo

press of the UNLOCK button.

To lock the doors:Press and release the LOCK bu

lock all doors. If the ignition is

locked, the p arking lights will flwill chirp on ce.

The horn chirp feature will be sh

plants activated. If desired this f

using the following procedure:

1. Perform this operation whi

vehicle.




2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed

(i.e. functional) key fob.

3. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and

hold th e PANIC button. Release both buttons at the same

time.

4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.

Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with

the park lamp flash feature activated. If d esired, this

feature can be d isabled by u sing the following procedu re:1. Perform this operation while standing outside the

vehicle.

2. Press and h old the UNLOCK button on a programm ed

(i.e. functional) key fob.

3. Continue to hold the UNLOC

seconds, but no longer than 10

hold the LOCK button. Releasetime.

4. To reactivate this feature, rep

Using the Panic AlarmTo activate the Panic mode while

and release the PANIC button

When the Panic mod e is activat

illuminate, the headlamps and

and the horn will sound.

To cancel the Panic mode pres

button on the transmitter a seco

automatically cancel after 3 mi

started and exceeds 15 mph. Du

door locks and remote keyless

tion normally. Panic mode wil

system on vehicles so equipped




General InformationThis device complies with p art 15 of FCC rules and with

RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that m ay cause u nd esired

operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap -

proved by the p arty responsible for compliance couldvoid the u ser’s au thority to operate the equipment.

If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a

normal distance, check for these two conditions.

1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the

batteries is from one to two years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmit

tower, airport transmitter, and s

Transmitter Battery Service

The recommended replacemen

2016 cell. This transmitter requ

Transmitter Battery




NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on

the back housing or the printed circuit board.

1. With transm itter buttons facing d own , use a flat bladeor dime to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.

Make s ure not t o dam age t he r ubber gasket dur ing

removal.

2. Remove and replace the batteries. Be careful not to

disturb the metal terminal near the batteries. Install the

batteries with the p ositive terminal up , reference the note

+ SIDE UP on the inside of the bottom half of the

transmitter case. Avoid touching the new batteries withyour fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If

you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

3. To reassemble the transmitter case snap the two h alves

together. Make sure there is an even gap between the tw o

halves. Test tran smitter op eration.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEONLY

Your vehicle m ay be equippedsystem, which will allow the v

distances u p to ap proximately

vehicle using the remote keyles

part of your ignition key.

In order to remote start you r veh

doors m ust be closed.

To remote start your vehicle, pr

button on the key fob twice windicate that the vehicle is ab

lights will flash and the horn w




Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15

minutes. To cancel remote start, p ress the REMOTE

START button once.

To enter the vehicle while the engine is runn ing d uring a

remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the

UNLOCK button on the key fob. After the vehicle is

un locked, you have 60 second s t

the key in the Ignition and mov

otherwise the engine will cancematically turn off.

Remote start w ill also cancel if a

• If the engine stalls or RPM ex

• Any engine warning lamps c

• The hood is opened

•

The hazard switch is pressed• The transmission is m oved o

• The brake pedal is pressed.

The vehicle can be started remo

two times. The vehicle is also all

failed start, where the remote sta

but cancelled before the engin

Remote Start Transmitter




either of th ese cond itions, or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is

alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle

must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition

and moving it to the RUN position, then back to LOCK.

The parking lamps will remain illuminated to indicate

that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is

running. The lamps will turn off when the ignition is

turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door LocksFront and Rear doors may be locked, by moving the lock

plunger up or down.

All doors may be opened with the inside door handle

without lifting the lock plunger. Doors locked before

closing will remain locked when closed.

The ignition key will unlock all the locks on your vehicle.

WARNIN

•

For personal security and saccident, lock the vehi cle d

well as when you park and

• Never leave children alon

children in a vehicle unatt

a number of reasons. A ch

seriously or fatally injured

in the ignition. A child

window s, other controls, o

Power Door Locks — If EquA power door lock switch is

panel. Use this switch to lock o




If you press the power door lock switch while the key is

in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power

locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-

tally locking your keys in the veh icle. Removing the key

or closing the d oor w ill allow the locks to operate. A

chime will sound if the key is i

a door is open, as a reminder to

Automatic Door Locks – If EIf this feature is enabled, yo

autom atically w hen the veh icle

Automatic Door Lock Progra

This feature is enabled when

from the assembly plant and can

following procedure:

1. Enter your vehicle and close2. Fasten your seat belt (Fast

cancel any chiming that may

programming procedure).

3. Place the key into the ignitio

Power Door Lock Switch Location




4. Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK

position to the ON/ RUN position a minimum of four

times; ending in the LOCK p osition (do not start the

engine).

5. Within 30 second s, press the d river’s d oor lock switch

in th e LOCK d irection.

6. A single chime will be heard to ind icate the feature has

been disabled.

7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.

8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceledbefore the feature could be d isabled. If n ecessary, repeat

the above procedure.

Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped

This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when

any door is opened . This w ill occur only after the veh icle

has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle

has been driven (shifted out of Park and all doors closed).

This feature w ill not operate

operation of the power door loc

Auto Unlock On Exit PrograCustomer Programming seque

the Auto Unlock Feature:

1. Enter your vehicle and close

2. Fasten you r seat belt (fastenin

any chimes that may be confus

ming procedure).

3. Insert the key into the ignitio

4. Within 15 seconds, cycle th

position to the ON/ RUN posi

times ending in the LOCK p o

engine).

5. Within 30 second s, press the

in the UNLOCK direction.




6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has

been changed.

7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature.

8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled

before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat

the above procedure.

Child Protection Door LockTo p rovide a safer environment for children riding in th e

rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle h ave the child-

protection door lock system.

To use the system, open each re

the ignition key or a similar ob

lever, slide the lever UP to enga

to disengage the child-protection

Child Protection Door




on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by

using the ou tside d oor hand le even if the inside door lock

is in the unlocked position.

WARNIN

Avoid trapping anyone in a

Remember that the rear doo

from the outside whe n the ch

engaged.

NOTE: After setting the chi

system, always test the door f

certain it is in the desired posit

NOTE: For emergency exit wmove the d oor lock switch to th

down the window and open th

door handle.

Child Lock Control




WINDOWS

Power Windows—If Equipped

The control on the left front door panel has up-down

switches that give you fingertip control of all power

wind ows. There is a single opening an d closing switch on

the front passenger door for passenger window control

a n d o n t he r ea r d o or s o f Q u

models. The windows will op

switch is turned to the ON or A

and for ten minutes after the ign

driver’s door is opened.

NOTE: The Power Accessory

the power windows to operate

ignition is turned off.

WARNIN

Never leave children alone

children in a vehicle unatten

number of reasons. A chil

seriously or fatally injured. D

the ignition. A child could op

other controls, or move the v

Power Window Switches




Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)

The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.

Press the w indow switch p ast the detent, release, and the

window will go down automatically.

Window Lockout Switch (4 Door Models Only)

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows

you to d isable the wind ow control on the other d oors. To

disable the window controls on the other d oors, press the

window lock button. To enable the window controls,

press the window control button again.

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be d escrib

pressure on the ears or a helic

ears. Your vehicle m ay exhibit

windows down or partially o

norm al occurrence and can be m

Window Lockou




occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and

rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSSome of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front

and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front

airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so

equipped, window bags for the driver and passengers

seated next to a wind ow. If you w ill be carrying children

too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be

used to hold infant and child restraint systems.Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to u se your restraint system

properly to keep you and your p assengers as safe as

possible.

WARNIN

In a collision, you and your

much greater injuries if you

led up. You can strike the int

other passengers, or you can

vehicle. Always be sure yo

vehicle are buckled up prope

Buckle up even though you are

on short trips. Someone on th e r

and cause a collision that includ

far away from home or on your

Research has shown that seat b

they can red uce the seriousness

Som e of t he w or st injur ies h

thrown from the vehicle. Seat be




of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a m otor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder BeltsAll seating positions except the Quad Cab front center

seating position have combination lap/ shoulder belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock du ring

very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the

shoulder part of the belt to move freely w ith you und er

normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock

and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNIN

It is extremely dangerous to

inside or outside of a vehicle

riding in these areas are mor

injured or killed.

Do not allow people to rid

vehicle that is not equipped w

Be sure everyone in your ve

using a seat belt properly.




WARNING!

• Wearing a se at belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat

belts are designed to go around the large bones of

your body. These are the strongest parts of your

body and can take the forces of a collision the

best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could

make your injuries in a collision much w orse. You

might suffer internal injuries, or you could even

slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-

tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep

your passengers safe, too.• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in an accident, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for

more than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating

1. Enter the vehicle and close

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is ab

seat, next to your arm in the re

Latch Pla




plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around

your lap.

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

WARNIN

• A belt buckl ed i nto the w

protect you properly. The laphigh o n your body, possibly caAlways buckle your belt into

• A belt that is too loose will n

In a sudden stop you could increasing the possibil ity o f belt snugly.

• A belt that is worn under yo

ous. Your body could strike thvehicle in a collision, increinjury. And a belt w orn undinternal injuries. Ribs aren’tbones. Wear the belt over youstrongest bones will take the

• A shoulder belt placed behi

from injury during a collisionhit your head in a collision ishoulde r belt. The lap and shobe used together.




4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdom en. To remove slack in th e lap belt portion, pu ll up

on th e shou lder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,

tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt

reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

WARNIN

• A lap belt worn too high c

internal injury in a collision

be at the strong h ip and pe lvic

abdomen. Always wear the

sible and keep it snug.

• A twisted be lt can’t do its jo

it could even cut into you. Be s

If you can’t straighten a belt

to your dealer and have it fix

5. Position the shoulder belt o

comfortable and not resting on

will withdraw any slack in the

Removing Slack From Belt




6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The belt w ill au tomatically retract to its stowed position.

If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to

allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision

and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt

system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose

parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat beltassemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (bent retractor, torn web bing,

etc.) or if the airbag deployed.

Standard Cab Front Center T

1. The front center seat belt on

disconnected to open up utilizabehind the front seats. The b

detached from the black keyed s

the inboard side of the passenge

ignition key into the center white

The black buckle latch plate c

key is pressed into the buckle. A

up t he s ur plus w ebbing, and

vertically from the cab back exit

the area behind the front seats.




2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull

the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back

pan el and insert it into the black keyed bu ckle un til there

is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the

proper seat belt usage.

WARNIN

• If the black latch and blac

erly connected when the s

occupant, the seat belt will

proper restraint and will

injury in a collision.

• When reattaching the b

b uck le, ensure th e seat

twisted. If the webbing

preceding procedure to det

black buckle, untwist the the black latch and black b

Detaching Buckle with Key




Inserting Latch Plate In Use Pos




WARNING!

If the black latch and buckle are not connected when

the seat belt is use d by an occupant, the se at belt will

not restrain you properly.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageIn the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be

adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt

away from your neck. Press the button located on the

upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the

position that serves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter

prefer a lower position, and if yo

you’ll prefer a higher p osition

anchorage, try to move it up or

it is locked in position.

Adjusting Upper S




Automatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode – IfEquippedIn this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-

locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack inthe shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-

able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-

tion lap/ shoulder belt.

When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode

Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger

seating p osition. Children 12 years old and un der shou ld

be prop erly restrained in the rear seat whenever p ossible.

How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap/ shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

the entire belt is extracted.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As

hear a clicking sound. This ind

now in the au tomatic locking m

How To Disengage The Auto

Disconnect the combination lap

it to retract completely to disen

ing mode and activate the vehic

locking mode.

Center Lap BeltsThe center seating position for

has a lap belt only. To fasten thplate into the buckle until you h

the lap belt, tilt the latch plate a

pu ll the loose end of the webbin

against the hips. Sit back and ere

the belt as tightly as is comforta




WARNING!

• A lap belt wo rn too loose or too high is dangerous.

• A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down

and under the belt in a collision.

• A belt that is too loose or too high w ill apply crash

forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip

bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries

is greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.

Seat Belt PretensionersThe s eat belt s for bot h fr ont s eating posit ions are

equipp ed w ith pretensioning d evices that are designed to

remove slack from the seat belt system in the event of a

collision. These devices improve the performance of the

seat belt by assuring that the belt is t ight about the

occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all

size occup ants, includ ing th ose in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a

belt placement by the occupant.

worn snugly and positioned pro

The p retensioners are triggere

mod ule. Like the airbags, the p r

items. After a collision that is

the airbags and pretensioners, b

Enhanced Driver Seat Belt R(BeltAlert)If the driver’s seat belt has not

second s of starting the v ehicle agreater than 5 mph (8 km/ h)

System (BeltAlert) will alert the

belt. The driver should also instr

buckle their seat belts. Once the

Enhanced Warning System (Be

chime and flash the Seat Bel

seconds or until the driver’s s




Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated

if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10

seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8

km/ h).

The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-

abled or di sabled by your authorized dealer or by

following these steps:

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first

60 second s of the ignition sw itch being turned to the ON

or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-

m end deact ivating t he Enhanced Warning Syst em(BeltAlert).

1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any

position except On or Start, buckle the d river’s seat belt.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait

for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.

3. Within 60 seconds of startin

and then re-buckle the driver’

t im es w it hin 10 s econds, end

buckled.

4. Turn off the engine. A sing

signify that you have successf

gramming.

The Enhanced Warning System

vated by repeating this p rocedu

NOTE: A lt hough t he Enha

(BeltAlert) has been deactivateLight will continue to illumina

belt remains unbuckled.




Seat Belts and Pregnant WomenWe recommend that p regnant w omen use seat belts

through out th eir pregnancies. Keeping the m other safe is

the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt

across the thighs and as snug against the hips as p ossible.

Keep the belt low so that i t does not come across the

abdom en. That w ay the strong bones of the hips will take

the force if there is a collision.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short, even w hen fully extended , yourdealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This

extender should be used only if the existing belt is not

long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-

tender and store it.

WARNIN

Using a seat belt extender

increase the risk of injury in aseat belt extender when the

enough when it is worn low

recommended seating positio

the extender when not neede

Driver And Right Front PassRestraint System (SRS)—Ai

This vehicle has front airbagsfront passenger as a supplemen

systems. The d river’s front ai

center of the steering wheel. The

is mounted in the instrument

compartm ent. The w ords SRS A

the airbag covers.




These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations

that allow less forceful dep loyments.

This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to

protect the driver and passengers in the first and second

row sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped

w it h w i ndow bags, t hey are located above t he s ide

windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.

WARNIN

• Do not put anything on or around

to manually open them. You maycould be injured because the airb

you. These protective covers for

signed to open only when the airb

• Do not moun t any aftermarket eq

controllers, snowplow controllers

dios, etc. on or behind the kne

designed to work with the air bag

Mounting any additional equipm

bolster can cause injury during a

• If your vehicle is equipped with

luggage or other cargo up high enthe window bag. The area where

should remain free from any obst

• If your vehicle is equipped w ith w

accessory items installed which w

adding a sunroof to your vehicle

require permanent attachments (b

on the vehicle roof. Do not drill in

any reason.




NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat

hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will imp ede the

proper p erformance of the window bags.

Airbags inflate in mod erate to high speed impacts. Along

with the seatbelts, front airbags work w ith the instrument

panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for

the d river an d front p assenger. Window bags also w ork

with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types

of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to

severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,t he w i ndow bag on t he cr as h s ide of t he vehicle is

triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain

types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be

triggered. But even in collisions wh ere the a irbags work,

you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position

for the airbags to protect you properly.

Here are some simple steps you

the risk of harm from a d eploy

•

Children 12 years and u nd er a rear seat, if av ailable.

• Infants in rear facing child

ride in the front seat of a vehi

airbag unless the airbag is t

Vehicles Only). An airbag d

vere injury or d eath to infant

Passenger Airbag On/ Off Sw

• If your vehicle does not hPassenger Airbag On/ Off Sw

• Children that are not big eno

vehicle seat belt (see sectio

should be secured in the rear

belt-positioning booster seat

not use child restraints or




seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.

Never allow children to slide the shou lder belt behind

them or under their arm.

• All occupants should use their seat belts properly.

• The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to

inflate.

WARNIN

• Relying on the airbags alo

severe injuries in a collisiwith your seat belt to rest

some collisions the airbag

Always wear your seat b

have airbags.

• Being too close to the ste

ment panel during airbag d

serious injury. Airbags ne

back, comfortably extendithe steering wheel or instr

• If the vehicle has window

room to inflate. Do not le

window. Sit upright in the




Airbag System Components

The airbag system consists of th e following:

• Airbag Control Module

• AIRBAG Readiness Light

• Driver Airbag

• Passenger Airbag

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Crash Sensor

• Interconnecting Wiring

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/ OFF Switch (Stan-

dard Cab Vehicles Only)

The Window Airbag System,

consists of the following:

• AIRBAG Readiness Light (sh

system)

• Window Bags Above the Sid

• Airbag Control Module (sha

system)

• Side impact sensors

• Interconnecting Wiring

How The Airbag System Wor

• The airbag control m odule

collision is severe enough t

inflate.

• The airbag control mod ule w

rear collisions.




• The airbag control modu le also m onitors the readiness

of the electronic parts of the system whenever the

ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions.

These include all of the items listed above except theknee bolsters, the instrument panel, and the steering

wh eel and column . If the key is in the Off position, in

the ACC position or not in the ignition, the airbags are

not on and will not inflate

• The airbag control modu le also tu rns on the AIR BAG

light in the instrum ent panel for 6 to 8 seconds when

the ignition is first turned on, then turns the light off.

• If it detects a malfun ction in any p art of thesystem, it turns on the light either m omen-

tarily or continuously. The instrument clus-

ter will flash the seat belt indicator if i t

detects a fault with the airbag indicator.

WARNIN

Ignoring the AIR BAG ligh

panel could mean you wonprotect you in a collision. If t

on, stays on after you start th

on as you drive, have the a

right away.

• When the airbag control mo

requiring the airbags, it sign

large quantity of nontoxic gthe airbags. The airbag cover

the way as the airbags infla

airbags fully inflate in millis

than it takes you to blink you

quickly deflate while helping

front passenger. The driver

t hrough vent s t ow ards t he




passenger’s front airbag is deflated th rough vent h oles

in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do

not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

• The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees and

position you for the best interaction with the front

airbag.

Passenger Airbag On/Off Sw

Vehicles Only)

The passenger front airbag is to

passenger:

• is an infant (less than 1 year

front seat because there is no r

seat is too small for a rear-f




because the infant has a medical condition which

makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the

infant,

• is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat

because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear

seat position available, or because the child has a

medical condition which makes it necessary for the

driver to be able to see the child,

• has a m edical condition w hich makes passenger airbag

inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger

than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument

panel) or windshield in a crash.

WARNIN

Whenever an airbag is tur

shoulder belted passenger maor chest on the dashboard

windshield in a crash. This

injury or death.

To Shut Off the Passenger Air

hicles Only)

Place the ignition key in the Pa

Switch, push the key in and tur

the key from the switch. This w

side airbag. The “Off” light nea

nate w hen t he i gnit ion s w it c

position.




To Turn On the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-

hicles Only)

Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/ Off

Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and

remove the key from the switch. This will turn on the

passenger airbag. The “Off” light near the sw itch will be

off when the ignition sw itch is turn ed to th e ON position.

If A Deployment Occurs

The airbag system is designed to dep loy when the air bag

control module detects a moderate-to-severe frontal col-

lision, and then immediately to deflate.

NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to

need airbag protection will not activate the system. This

does not m ean s om ething is w r ong w i th t he air bag

system.

If you d o have a collision w hich

or all of the following may occu

• The nylon airbag material ma

sions and/ or skin reddening

pass enger as t he air bags d

abrasions are similar to fric

you might get sliding along

floor. They are not caused by

They are not permanent and

How ever, if you haven’t hea

few days, or if you have any b

immediately.

• As the airbags d eflate you m

particles. The p articles are a n

process that generates the non

inflation. These airborne parti

eyes, nose, or th roat. If you h

rinse the area with cool w




irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,

see your doctor. If these particles settle on your

clothing, follow the garment manu facturer’s instruc-

tions for cleaning.

• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the

airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another

collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-

sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Window Airbags Supplemen

(SRS)—If Equipped

The window airbag control mo

collision is severe enough to reinflate. The window airbag c

detect roll over, front or rear co

The airbag control module mon

electronic parts of the system

s w it ch is in t he START or

include all of the items listed a

mod ule also turns on the AIRBA

panel for 6 to 8 seconds when thon as a diagnostic or system ch

off. If it detects a malfunction i

it turns on the light either mom

The side (window) impact SRS

activate only in certain side col

control module detects a collisi




bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of

the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to

inflate t he w i ndow bag. The inflating w i ndow bag

pushes the side pillar molding out of the way and coversthe w indow. The airbag inflates in about 30 millisecond s

(about one-quarter of the time it takes to blink you r eyes)

with enou gh force to injure you if you are not belted and

seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area

wh ere the w indow bag inflates. This especially ap plies to

children. The w indow bag is only about 3 1 ⁄ 2 inches (8.9

cm) thick when it is inflated.

Enhanced Accident Response SystemIf the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical

system remains functional, vehicles equipped with

power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,

approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped

moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition

switch is turned off.

Maintaining Your Airbag Sys

WARNIN

• Modifications to any part

could cause it to fail when

be injured because the ai

protect you. Do not modi

wiring, including adding

stickers to the steering wh

the upper right side of the

not modify the front bump

ture, or frame.• You need proper knee im

collision. Do not mount or

equipment on or behind th

• It is dangerous to try to r

airbag system y ourself. Be

works on your vehicle that




Airbag Light

You will want to have the airbags ready to

inflate for your protection in an impact. While

the airbag system is designed to be mainte-nance free, if any of the following occurs, have

an authorized dealer service the system promptly:

• The airbag light does not come on or flickers during

the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first

turned on.

• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second

interval.

• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while

driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine

related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-

ule may also be d isabled. The airbags may not be ready

to inflate for your protection. P

bers 52 and 53 in the fuse an

dealer if the fuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)In the event of an airbag depl

designed to record up to 2-se

data param eters (see list below)

prior to the moment of airbag

that such data are ONLY record

and are otherwise u navailable.

data gathered during a complet

the electronic data may be uCorporation and others to learn

causes of crashes and associa

assess and improve vehicle per




crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corpo-

ration, such investigations may be requested by custom-

ers, insurance carriers, governm ent officials, and profes-

sional crash researchers, such as those associated withuniversities, and with hospital and insurance organiza-

tions.

In t he event t hat an inves tigation is under taken by

DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),

the company or its designated representative will first

obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for

the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before

accessing the electronic data stored, u nless ordered todown load data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,

pur suant t o a w ar rant). A copy of t he dat a w ill be

provided to the custodial entity upon request. General

data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes

may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash

databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-

ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive

nature, such as would identify

hicle, or crash, will be treated co

data will not be disclosed by D

tion to any third p arty except w

1. Used for research purposes

with a particular crash record i

provided confidentiality of pe

preserved

2. Used in d efen se of l

DaimlerChrysler Corporation p

3. Requested by p olice u nder a

4. Otherwise required by law

Data Parameters that May Be R

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) a

for electronically-controlled

the airbag system




• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)

• Time of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition

cycles and vehicle mileage)

• Airbag d eployment level (if app licable)

• Seatbelt status

• Brake status (service and parking brakes)

• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed )

• Engine control status (including engine speed)

• Cruise control status

Child RestraintEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the

time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United

States and all Canadian provinces require that small

children r ide in prop er restraint systems. This is the law,

and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years and und er sh

led up in a rear seat, if avail

statistics, children are safer wh

the rear seats rather than in the

WARNIN

In a collision, an unrestrain

baby, can become a missile i

force required to hold even an

become s o great that you coul

matter how strong you are.

could be badly injured. An

vehicle sho uld be in a proper

size.




Infants and Small Children

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that iscorrect for your child:

• Sa fet y e xp er ts r eco m m en d t ha t ch ild r en r id e

rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least

one year old an d w eigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two ty pes

of child restraints can be u sed rearward -facing: infant

carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of

child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/

shoulder belt.

• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the

vehicle. It is recomm ended for children wh o w eigh up

to abou t 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be

used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the

vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher

weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than

infant carriers do, so they can

by children w ho w eigh more

less than one year old.

• Rearward-facing child seats

the front seat of a vehicle with

unless the airbag is turned of

could cause severe injury or

position.

• Children who weigh more th

are older than one year can ri

vehicle. Forward-facing chil

child seats used in the forwar

children who weigh 20 to 40

are older than one year. These

in the vehicle by the lap/ sho

• The belt-positioning booster s

ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg),

to fit the vehicle’s seat bel




cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat

cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back,

they sh ould use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The

child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by thelap/ shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped

with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the

la p p o rt io n.) Fo r fu r th er in fo rm a tio n r efe r t o

www.seatcheck.org.

WARNIN

• Improper installation can

infant or child restraint. Icollision. The child could

killed. Follow the manufa

actly when installing an in

• A rearward facing child re

used in a rear seat, or in

passenger’s front airbag is

On, a rearward facing chil

seat may be struck by aairbag which may cause se

the infant.




Here are some tips forgetting the most out of yourchild

restraint:

• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it

has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. We also recommend that you make sure

that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle

where you will use it before you buy it.

• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s

weight an d height. Check the label on th e restraint for

weight and height limits.

• Carefully follow the instructions that come with therestraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may

not work when you need it.

• The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic

Locking Retractors (ALR), which are designed to keep

the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that

it is not necessary to use a locking clip.

Pull the belt from the retracto

allow you to pass through the

the latch plate into the buck

until it is all removed from thto return to the retractor, pu

bing to t ighten the lap por

straint. Refer to the Autom

(ALR) Mode earlier in this s

• In the rear seat, you m ay ha

lap/ shoulder belt on the ch

buckle or latch plate is too

opening on the restraint. Difrom the buckle and twist th

several times to shorten it. I

the buckle with the release b

• If the belt still can’t be tigh

pushing on the restraint loos

the latch plate from the buc




around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle

again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,

try a different seating position.

• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child

restraint man ufacturer’s directions.

• When your child restraint is not in u se, secure it in th e

vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.

Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or

collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs

and cause serious personal injury.

WARNIN

Improper installation can l ead

or child restraint. It could coThe child could be badly inj

the manufacturer’s direction

ing an infant or child restrain

Lower Anchors and Tether fo

Each vehicle is equipped with t

age system called LATCH, w

Anchors and Tether for CHildreanchorage systems are installe

passenger seat position and t

outboard positions. LATCH eq

feature both lower anchor bar s,

seat cushion, and tether strap an

the seatback (refer to Child Rest

in this section).




Identification dots are located above the standard cab

front seat lower anchorages as a guide for locating lower

anchors.

NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Stan-dard Cab m odel refer to the “Passenger Airbag On/ Off

Switch” located in this section.

Standard Cab Passenger Seat

Quad Cab Rear Ou




Child restraint systems having attachments designed to

connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child

restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection

to the seatback tether anchorage have been available forsome time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers

will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their

older products.

Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to

passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child

restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-

ages w ill continue to have features for installation in

vehicles using the lap or lap/ shoulder belt. They will alsohave tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage

of all of the available attachments provided with your

child restraint in an y vehicle.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to

install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts

not being used for occupan t restraints are stowed an d ou t

of reach of children. It is re

installing the child restraint, bu

seat belt is tucked behind the c

reach. If the buckled seat belt restraint installation, instead o

behind the child restraint, route

child restraint belt path and the

stow th e seat belt out of the reac

Remind all children in the vehi

not toys and should not be p lay

your child unattended in the ve

NOTE: If your child restraint patible, install the restraint usin




Installing the Child Restraint System

WARNING!

Do not install child restraint systems equipped with

LATCH attachme nts in the center posi tion of a Quad

Cab model rear seat. The LATCH anchorages in this

seat are designed for the two outboard seating posi-

tions only. A child may be placed in the rear center

seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat

belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to foll ow thi s

may result in serious or fatal injury.

We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the

manu facturer w hen installing y our child restraint. Many,

but not all , restraint systems will be equipped with

separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or

connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the

s tr ap. Forw ard-facing t oddl er r es tr aint s and s om e

rearward-facing infant restrain

with a tether strap, a hook and

tension in the strap.

In general, you will first loosen straps and tether straps so that y

the hook or connector to the low

anchorages. Then tighten all thr

child restraint rearward and do

Not all child restraint systems

have described here. Again, car

tions that come with the child r




WARNING!

Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant orchild restraint. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly

when installing an infant or child restraint.

Child Restraint Tether Anchor

Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-

nection to tether anchors have been available for some

time. In fact, many child restraint manu facturers w illprovide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.

Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether

anchorages, one each behind the front center and right

seats. Quad Cab models have three anchorages, one

behind each of the rear seats.

WARNIN

An incorrectly anchored teth

seat failure and injury to the cseat could come loose and al

into the inside of the vehicle

even be thrown from the

anchor positions directly be

secure a child restraint top te

instructions below. See your

essary.

Tether Anchorage Points at t

Front Seat (Regular Cab - Al

1. Place the child restraint on

tether strap so that it will reach

the head restraint to the tether a

seat.




2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to

the square opening in the sheet metal.

3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the

tether strap according to the man ufacturer’s instructions.

Multiple Child Restraint Ins

(Quad Cab Rear Seats)

1. Obtain tether straps by raisin

reaching between the rear glassstrap may be retained with an e

to the tether strap is greatly imp

cushion to the “up” position. R

use.

2. Place a child restraint on eac

adjust the tether strap so that it w

restraint to the tether an chor dir

then to the anchor directly behi

3. Pass each tether strap hook

and through the loop of w ebbin

4. Route each tether strap to the

seat, and attach the hooks to thRegular Cab Tether Strap Mounting




5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and

adjust the tether strap so that it will reach un der th e head

restraint to th e tether anchor d irectly behind the seat and

to the anchor directly behind the right seat.

6. Install each child restraint an

tether strap according to the ch

er’s instructions.




Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab




Children Too Large for Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against theseat back should use the lap/ shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug

as possible.

• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or

slouching can move the belt out of position.

If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a

child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind

their back.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMA long break-in period is not re

your new vehicle. Drive moder

miles (500 km ). After t he initial up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km

cruising, brief full-throttle accel

of local traffic laws, contributes

Avoid wide open throttle accele

The engine oil installed in the

high quality, energy conserv

changes should be consistent

matic conditions under whichoccur. The recommend ed viscos

discussed in Section 7 und er M

Engine Oil.

NON -DETERGENT OR STRA

MUST NEVER BE USED.




A new engine may consume some oil during its first few

thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the

break-in and is not an indication of difficulty.

CAUTION!

• During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new

vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so

may damage your axles, driveline and vehicle.

• Limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) during the

first 500 miles (805 km) of towing.




UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR

CONTENTS

Power Wagon Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Locking Front And Rear Differentials . . . . . . . .78

▫ 4.56:1 Gear s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

▫ Electronically Disconnecting Stabilizer/

Sway Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

▫ Increased Ride Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

▫ 12,000 Lb. Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

▫ High-Pressure Monotube Shocks/ New Front And

Rear Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

▫ Off Road Tires 80

▫ Skid Plates And Underbod

▫ Wheel Flares . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Standard Package Features

▫ Mopar Op tions . . . . . . . .

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Inside Mirror . . . . . . . . .

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirro

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . .

O O



▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .85

▫ Electronic Power Mirrors –If Equipped . . . . . . .85

▫ Electric Rear Wind ow Defroster And Heated

Sideview M irrors – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .86

▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors – If Equipped . . . . . . . .86

Han ds–Free Com mu nication (UConnect™) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .103

▫ Things You Shou ld Know Abou t You r

UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

▫ 40-20-40 Front Seat . . . . .

▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . .

▫ Adjustable Head Restraint

▫ Manual Rotary Lumbar Su

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Power Seats — If Equipped

▫ Heated Seats — If Equippe

To Open And Close The Hoo

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . .

▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . .

▫ Headlamp Delay . . . . . . .

▫ Head lights, Parking Lights

74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR



▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only And

Fleet Vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

▫ Lights-On Remind er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

▫ Multifun ction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . .125

▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . .128

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . .

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . .

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting

▫ To Accelerate For Passing

Overhead Console— If Equip

▫ Courtesy/ Reading Lights .

Overhead Console With Com

Mini-Trip Comp uter — If Eq

▫ US/ M Button . . . . . . . . .

▫ Reset Button . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Global Reset . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Step Button . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Average Fuel Economy (AV





▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

▫ Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

▫ C/ T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

▫ Autom atic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . .136

▫ Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

▫ Recalibrating The Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

▫ Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .139

▫ Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

▫ Canadian Programming/ Gate Programming . .143

▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

▫ Erasing HomeLink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

▫ Reprogramming a Single H

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Sunroof — If Equippe

▫ Open Sunroof - Express M

▫ Comfort Stop . . . . . . . . .

▫ Closing Sunroof - Express

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . .

▫ Pinch Protect Override . .

▫ Venting Sunroof - Express

▫ Sunshade Operation . . . .

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . .

▫ Sun roof Maintenance . . . .

▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . .





Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders . . . . . . . . 151

▫ Rear Cup holder — Quad Cab — If Equipped .151

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

▫ Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . .152

▫ Storage And Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .153

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

▫ Electric Rear Wind ow Defroster And Heated

Side View Mirrors — If Equipp ed . . . . . . . . . .154

▫ Power Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped . . .154

▫ Sliding Rear Wind ow—If Equipped . . . . . . . . 155

Fold Flat Load Floor — If Eq

Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . .

Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . .

Easy-Off Tailgate . . . . . . . .

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Transporting Passengers .

▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . .

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Safety Checks You Should Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Safety Checks You Should

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .





POWER WAGON FEATURES

Locking Front and Rear DifferentialsMost 4WD trucks are equipped with open differentials

front an d rear. This design is used because it allows eachwheel to turn independently helping to eliminate bind-

ing when cornering. A disadvantage of using an open

differential is w hen one or more wh eels lose traction; all

of the power is directed to those wheels resulting in a loss

of m om ent um . The Pow er Wagon is equipped w i th

electronically locking front and rear differentials. These

differentials, when engaged, mechanically lock together

the axle shafts forcing the w heels to spin at an equ al rate.

This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum and

thus prevents it from becoming stuck. The locking front

and rear differentials should only be engaged du ring

low-speed, extreme off-road situations where one wheel

is likely to not be in contact with the ground. It is not

recommended to drive the vehi

locked on pavement due to the

and speed limitations.

4.56:1 GearsThis is the highest axle ratio

pickup. The high gearing help

increased rolling mass and in

off-road tires. As well, there a

higher axle ratio in off-road ap

downhill the high gearing enab

engine to slow the vehicle dow

manner. When driving up a ste

by keeping t he t r uck in it s

maintain upward momentum.





Electronically Disconnecting Stabilizer/Sway BarStabilizer bars are used to help distribute load force from

one side of the vehicle to the other. This helps to reduce

body roll and create a smoother ride during on-road

driving. However, this becomes a d isadvantage wh en the

vehicle is driven off-road wh en a higher level of suspen-

sion articulation is needed. By disconnecting the stabi-

lizer bars, each wheel can now reach its maximum range

of m ovement. This enables the vehicle to maintain a

greater tire contact patch, and thus more traction, when

traversing severe off-road terrain.

Increased Ride HeightDue to th e use of taller springs, the Pow er Wagon has an

increased ride height of approximately 1.9 inches in the

front and 1.5 inch in the rear. It allows the truck to

traverse larger obstructions an d provides a better seating

position from w hich to view the trail. A major ad vantage

to increasing ride height is the positive effect it has on

approach/ departure and break

height allows for more aggressiv

ing off-road capability.

12,000 lb. WinchThe Power Wagon is the only

electric vehicle recovery winc

winch provides the vehicle wi

capability and versatility. This

power from the vehicle charg

motor that winds wire rope o

planetary gear reduction. By n at

generating very high forces an

care. Do not operate the win

und erstanding the complete w

manu al, includ ing all warnings





High-Pressure Monotube Shocks/New Front andRear SpringsThe new variable-rate shocks and revised springs help to

create a suitable on-road ride without compromising

off-road competency. The shocks are designed to provide

improved stability, d urability, and suspension articula-

tion.

Off-Road TiresThese tires are specifically designed for extreme off-road

use, wh ile also maintaining qu ite on-road operation. The

tires utilize long-life compounds for increased durability,

and a deep-groove tread for extra traction. The LT285/

70R17D used provides a large contact patch for better

traction, two full-width steel belts for imp roved strength,

as well as a reinforced sidewall to help protect against

bruising and shredding.

Skid Plates And Underbody Steel skid plates protect the maj

of the truck including the fuel

s teer ing dam per. In addit ion

equipped with boxed cross me

This additional protection allo

lized in severe off-road situatio

ered impassable by a normal tr

Wheel FlaresNot just for looks, the wheel fla

were d esigned to help cover its

The larger flares also help to red

that can be flun g up by the more

on the tires.





WheelsStylish forged aluminum 17 wheels give the Power

Wagon a powerful stance. Forging a wheel from alumi-

num produces a stronger, l ighter weight wheel than

machining or casting the wheel out of the same material.

Standard package features:

• Fuel Tank Skid Plate - p rotects the fuel tank from

impingement damage.

• Transfer Case Skid Plate and Tubing - p rotects the

transfer case and exhaust catalyst from impingement

damage.

• H eavy D uty C ross Mem ber s - pr ot ect s t he under

carriage and supp orts the und er body protection skid

plates.

• Fore/ Aft rails - which connect the cross member for

additional support and prevent the truck from getting

hung up on large rocks between the cross m embers.

• Steering Dampener Skid Pla

dampener from impingemen

• Electronically Locking Front

tials With 4:56 Gears - improlation by locking the differen

• Electronically Disconnecting

mobility and articulation by

lizer Bar.

• 160 Amp Alternator - supp

power for the winch and othe

• Heavy Duty Battery - supppower for the winch and othe

• Heavy Duty Cooling Fan - p

and transmission cooling u

conditions.





• Off-Road Tun ed Susp ension And Shocks - imp roves

mobility, ground clearance and ride comfort.

• Heavy Duty Thermally Protected and Sealed Electric

Winch With Roller Fairlead - Useful for work andvehicle recovery.

• 17 Inch Forged Aluminu m Wheels With 33 Inch Tires

- improves traction and differential ground clearance.

Mopar Options:

• Rock Rails - p rotects the door sills from imp ingement

damage and provides a vehicle jacking point.

• Winch accessory kit - Contents include:

• Snatch Block/ Pu lley

• Clevis

• Tree strap

• Tow Strap

• Gloves

• “Power Wagon embossed”

• Bed Liner - protects the bed

ag e

NOTE: These Mopar options

signed and tested for the Pow

vigorous off-road conditions.

8 U S G U S O OU C




MIRRORS

Inside MirrorThe mirror should be ad justed to center on the view

through the rear window.

Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the

small control u nder the mirror to the night position

(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted

while set in the day position (toward windshield).

Adjusting Rear V




Automatic Dimming Mirror – If EquippedThis mirror autom atically ad justs for ann oying head light

glare from vehicles behind you. You can tur n the feature

on or off by pressing the bu tton at th e base of the mirror.

A light in the button will indicate when the dimming

feature is activated.

CAUTIO

To avoid damage to the m

never spray any cleaning sol

mirror. Apply the solution o

wipe the mirror clean.

Outside MirrorsTo receive maximum benefit, ad

to center on the adjacent lane

overlap of the view obtained on

Automatic Dimming Mirror




WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex

mirror will look smaller and farther away than they

really are. Relying too much on your right side

convex mirror could cause you to collide with an-

other vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror

when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen

in the right side convex mirror. Some vehicles will

not have a convex right side mirror.

Exterior Mirrors Folding FeatureAll 6 x 9 inch exterior mirrors are hinged and may be

moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The

hinges have three d etent positions; full forward, full

rearward, and normal.

Electronic Power Mirrors –If

Power Mirror M




The controls for the power mirrors are located on the

driver’s door trim panel.

Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right

mirror, and set it to the center off position to prevent

accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished

ad justin g th e m irror. To ad just a m irror, select left or right

with the top switch, and press o

the direction you want the mirr

Electric Rear Window Defro

Sideview Mirrors – If EquippThe Electric Rear Windo

side view mirrors are a

heated grid button, located on th

with the ignition On. Turnin

defroster or the ignition will de

Wind ow Defroster and Heated s

These features also tu rn off a

minutes have elapsed. To reac

button again.

Trailer Towing Mirrors – If EThese mirrors are designed w

head to p rovide a greater vis

Power Mirror Switches




extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-

board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or

In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main

mirror surface.

NOTE: Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors

rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.

HANDS–FREE COMMUNICAIF EQUIPPEDUConnect™ is a voice-activated

communications system. UCon

a phone number with your cell

voice commands (e.g., Call” “Blindspot Mirror

Trailer Towing




“248-555-1212). Your cellular phon e’s au dio is trans-

mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system

w ill autom at ically m ut e your r adi o w hen us ing t he

UConnect™ system.

NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular

phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile,

version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/ uconnect

for supported phones.

UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the

system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your

vehicle, and enables you to m ute the system’s micro-

phone for private conversation.

The UConnect™ phon ebook enables you to store up to 32

names and four num bers per name. Each language has a

separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that

language. This system is driven through your Blue-

tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™

features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard

that enables different electroni

each other without wires or a d

nect works no matter where

phone (be it your purse, pocket

your phone i s t ur ned on and vehicle’s UConnect™ system.

allows u p to seven cellular ph on

Only one linked (or paired) cel

with the system at a time. Th

English, Spanish, or French lan

The rearview mirror contains

system and the control buttons

access the system.




The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-

Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phon e. See

www.chrysler.com/ uconnect for supp orted phones. If

your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,

Headset Profile), you may not b

nect™ features. Refer to your ce

the phone manufacturer for det

The UConnect™ system is fuvehicle’s audio system. The vo

system can be adjusted either

control knob, or from the steer

(right switch), if so equipped.

The radio d isplay w ill be used

the UConnect™ system such a

certain radios.

OperationsVoice commands can be used to

system and to navigate throug

structure. Voice commands a

UConnect™ system p romp ts. Yo

specific command and then guid

options.

UConnect™ Switches




• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for

the voice on beep, which follows the Ready prompt

or another prompt.

•

For certain operations, compound commands can beused. For examp le, instead of saying Setup and then

Phone Pairing, the following compound command

can be said: Setup Phone Pairing.

• For each feature explanation in this section, only the

combined form of the voice command is given. You

can also break the commands into parts and say each

part of the command, when you are asked for it. For

example, you can use the combined form voice com-mand Phonebook New Entry, or you can break the

combined form command into two voice commands:

Phonebook an d New Entry. Please remember, the

UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a

norm al conversational tone, as if speaking to some one

sitting eight feet away from you.

Voice Command Tree

Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end

Help Command

If you need assistance at any pknow you r options are at any p r

ing the voice on beep. The UCo

all the options at any prompt if

To activate the UConnect™ sy

press the ’Phone’ button and fo

directions. All UConnect™ syst

press of the ’Phone’ button on t

Cancel CommandAt any prompt, after the voic

Cancel and you w i l l be r et u

However, in a few instances t

back to the previous menu.




Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone

To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair

your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.

NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellularphone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile,

version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/ uconnect

for supported phones.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-

ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the

following vehicle specific websites may also provide

detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone

that you have:NOTE:

• www.chrysler.com/ uconnect

• www.dodge.com/ uconnect

• www.jeep.com/ uconnect

The following are general phon

pairing instructions:

• Press the ’Phone’ button to b

• After the Ready prompt andSetup Phone Pairing and fo

• When prompted, after the vo

Phone and follow the aud ib

• You will be asked to say a

which you will later need to

You can enter an y four-digit

need to remember this pin pairing process.

• For identification purposes,

give the UConnect™ system

phone. Each cellular phone

given a unique phone name.




• You will then be asked to give your cellular p hone a

priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest

priority. You can p air up to seven cellular p hones to

your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,

only one cellular phone can be in use, connected toyour UConnect™ System. The priority allows the

UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to

use if mu ltiple cellular ph ones are in th e vehicle at the

same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5

phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™

system will use the p riority 3 cellular ph one w hen y ou

make a call. You can select to use a lower priority

cellular phone at any time (refer to Advanced PhoneConnectivity).

Call/Dial by Saying a Number

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.

• After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say

Dial.

• System will prompt you to s

call.

• For example, you can say 23

• The UConnect™ system willber and t hen di al. The num

display of certain radios.

Call/Dial by Saying a Name

• Press the “Phone” button to

• After the Ready prompt and

“Dial” or Call.

• System will prompt you to sa

you want call.


the name of the person you w




you can say John Doe, where John Doe is a previ-

ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-

book. Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect™

Phonebook, t o l ea rn h ow t o s t or e a n a me in t he

phonebook.

• The UConnect™ system will confirm the n ame and

then dial the corresponding phone number, which

may appear in the d isplay of certain radios.

Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended

when vehicle is not in motion.

• Press the “Phone” button to begin.


Phonebook New Entry.

• When p romp ted, say the nam

long names helps the voice r

mended . For example, say R

instead of Bob.

• When prompted, enter the n

Home, Work, Mobile, or

you to store multiple nu mb

entry, if desired.

• When pr om pt ed, r ecit e t he

phonebook entry that you ar

After you are finished adding

book, you will be given the ophone nu mbers to the current

main menu.

The UConnect™ system will al

names in the phonebook with




four associated phone num bers and designations. Each

language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible

only in that language.

Edit Entries in the UConnect™ PhonebookNOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended




Phonebook Edit.

• You w ill then be asked for the name of the phon ebook

entry that you wish to edit.

• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,

mobile, or pager) that you wish to ed it.

• When p rompted, recite the new phone n umber for the

phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished ed iting an

you will be given the opportuni

in the phonebook, call the num

return to the main menu.

Phonebook Edit can be us ed

n u m be r t o a n a me e nt ry t ha

ph onebook. For example, the en

mobile and a home number, but

work number later using the P

Delete Entries in the UConne

NOTE: Editing phonebook e




Phonebook Delete.




• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will

then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish

to d elete. You can either say the n ame of a ph onebook

entry that you wish to delete or you can say List

Names to hear a list of the entries in the ph onebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries

from the list, press the Voice Recognition button

while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired

entry and say Delete.

• After you enter the n ame, the UConnect™ system w ill

ask you which designation you wish to d elete, home,

work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish

to delete.

• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current

language is deleted.

After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-

leted. N ote t hat only t he phonebook in t he cur rent

language is deleted.

Delete All Entries in the UCo



Phonebook Erase All.

• The UConnect™ system will

wish to delete all the entries

• After confirmation, the pho

deleted.

List All Names in the UConn

•

Press the ’Phone’ button to b• After the Ready prompt and

Phonebook List Names.

• The UConnect™ system w ill

phonebook entries.




• To call one of the names in the list, press the Voice

Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired

name, and then say Call. NOTE: the user can also

exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point.

• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to

number designation you wish to call.

• The selected number will be dialed.

Phone Call FeaturesThe following features can be accessed through the

UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your

cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service

plan provides three-way calling, this feature can beaccessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with

your cellular service provider for the features that you

have.

Answer or Reject an Incomin

Currently in Progress

When you receive a call on y

UConnect™ system will inter

system, if on, and w ill ask if youcall. To reject the call, press and

until you hear a single beep ind

call was rejected.

Answer or Reject an Incomin

Currently in Progress

If a call is currently in progre

incoming call, you will hear the

call waiting that you normally hphone. Press the ’Phone’ button

on hold and answ er t he inc

UConnect™ system compatible

do not support rejecting an inc

call is in progress. Therefore,

answer an incoming call or ign




Making a Second Call while Current Call in

Progress

To make a second call while you are currently in a call,

press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say Dial or

Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entryyou wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the

second call is in p rogress. To go back to the first call, refer

to Toggling Between Calls. To combine two calls, refer

to Conference Call.

Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold

To put a call on hold, press the Phone’ button until you

hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.

To bring the call back from hold, press and hold thePhone’ button u ntil you hear a single beep.

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),

press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep

indicating that the active and ho

have sw itched. Only one call can

time.

Conference Call

When two calls are in progress

hold), press and hold the ’Phone

double beep indicating that t

joined into one conference call.

Three-Way Calling

To initiate three-way calling, p

tion’ button w hile a call is in pro

phone call as described underwh ile Cur rent Call in Progress.

established, press and hold the

hear a double beep indicating

been joined into one conference




Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the Phone’

button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if

there is a call on hold, it w ill become the new active call.

Redial



Redial.

• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that

was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not

be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-tem.

Call Continuation

Call continuation is progression of a phone call on

UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has

been switched to off. Call continuation functionality

available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

• After ignition key is switche

on th e UConnect™ system ei

until the vehicle battery cond

the call on the UConnect™ s

call to the mobile phone.

• After ignition key is sw itched

on the UConnect™ system f

which the call is au tomatica

UConnect™ system to the m

• An active call is automati

mobile phone after ignition k

UConnect™ System Feature

Language Selection

To change the language that th

using,


Af h R d d h f ll i b If h h i h bl d





t he nam e of t he language you w is h t o s w it ch t o

(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipp ed).

• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete

language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and

voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-

eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is

usable. The paired phone name is not language specific

and usable across all languages.

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is

reachable:

• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency

number for your area.

If the phon e is not reachable and

is operational, you may reach t

follows:



Emergency and the UConne

the paired cellular phone to

ber. This feature is only supp

NOTE: The emergency numb

Country where the vehicle is pur

Canad a and 060 for Mexico). Th

be applicable with the available

The UConnect™ system does sli

of successfully making a p hone

ph one directly.

Your p hone mu st be turned on

nect™ system to allow use o

it ti h th ll h h t k P i




emergency situations when the cell phone has network

coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system.

Towing Assistance

If you need towing assistance,



Towing Assistance.

NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based

on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-

528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454

for M exico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outsid e Mexico

city in Mexico).

Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-

age details in the Warranty information booklet and on

the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.

Paging

To learn h ow to p age, refer to W

Systems. Paging works prope

certain companies w hich time

work properly with the UConn

Voice Mail Calling

To learn how to access your voic

with Automated Systems.

Working with Automated Sy

This method is designed to be

one generally has to press num b

keypad while navigating thro

phone system.

You can u se you r UConn ect™

mail system or an automated

service or automated custome

require imm ediate response sele

that may be too quick for use o

Wh lli b ith UC t™ t T rning Confirmation Promp

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE



When calling a number with your UConnect™ system

that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone

sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push

the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you

wish to enter followed by the word Send. For example,if required to enter your pin number followed with a

pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’

button and say 3 7 4 6 # Send. Saying a number, or

sequence of num bers, followed by Send is also to be

used to navigate through an automated customer service

center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.

Barge In - Overriding Prompts

The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be u sed wh en youw is h t o s kip par t of a pr om pt and is sue your voice

recognition comman d immediately. For example, if a

prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone, clear

a, you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and

say Pair a Phone to select that op tion without h aving to

listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

Turning Confirmation Promp

Turning confirmation prompts

from confirming your choice

system will not repeat a phone

it).



Setup Confirmations. The

play the current confirmation

will be given the choice to ch

Phone and Network Status In

If available on the radio and/ osuch as the instrument panel c

your cell phone, the UConnec

notification to inform you of y

status when you are attemptin

using UConnect™. The status i

work signal strength, phone bat

Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad Mute/Un mute (Mute off)




Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad

You can dial a p hone nu mber w ith your cellular p hone

keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while

dialing v ia the cell phon e keypad , the user m ust exercise

caution and take p recautionary safety measures). Bydialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular

phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s

audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the

same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.

NOTE: Certain brand s of mobile ph ones do not send th e

dial ring to the UConnect™ system to p lay it on the

vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this

situation, after successfully dialing a number, the usermay feel that the call did not go through even though the

call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will

hear the audio.

Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)

When you m ute the UConnect™

able to hear the conversation

party, but the other party will n

order to mu te the UConnect™

• Press the ’Voice Recognition


Mute.

In order to u n-mute the UConn

• Press the ’Voice Recognition

• After the Ready prompt andMute-off.



Select another Cellular Phone Delete UConnect™ Paired Ce




Select another Cellular Phone

This feature allows you to select and start using another

phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must

have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system

that you want to use it with.



Setup Select Phone and follow the promp ts.

• You can also press the Voice Recognition’ button

anytime w hile the list is being p layed, and then choose

the ph one that you wish to select.

• The selected phone will be used for the next phone

call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-

nect™ system will return to using the highest priority

phone present in or near (approximately with in 30

feet) the vehicle.

Delete UConnect Paired Ce



Setup Phone Pairing.

• A t t he n ext p ro m p t, s ay

prompts.

• You can also press the Vo

anytime w hile the list is bein

the phone you wish to delete

Things You Should Know Ab

System

Voice Recognition (VR)

• Always wait for the beep bef

• Speak normally without pausing just as you would • When n avigating through an




• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would

speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet

away from you.

• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking

during a voice recognition period.

• Performance is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows,

• dry weather condition.

• Even though the system is designed for users speaking

in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-

cents, the system m ay not always work for some.

• When n avigating through an

as voice mail, or when send

speaking the digit string, ma

• Storing names in phonebook

motion is recommended .

• It is not r ecom m ended t o

names in the UConnect™ ph

• UConnect™ p honebook nam

optimized for the voice of th

name in the phonebook.

• You can say O (letter O) fo

spoken eight-zero-zero.

• Even though international d

combinations is supported,

number combinations may n

Far End Audio Performance Bluetooth Communication Li




Far End Audio Performance

• Audio qu ality is maximized und er:

• low-to-medium blower setting,

• low-to-medium vehicle speed,

• low road noise,

• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows, and

• dry weather condition.

• Operation from driver seat.

• Performan ce, such as au dio clarity, echo, and loudn ess

to a large degree rely on the p hone and network, and

not the UConnect™ system.

• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering

the in-vehicle audio volume.

Bluetooth Communication Li

Occasionally, Cellular p hones h

connection to the UConnect™

pens, the connection can gener

switching the phone off/ on. Ymended to remain in Bluetooth

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key

or ACC position, or after a rese

five (5) seconds prior to using t




North American English SEATS




North American English

Prim ary Alternate(s)

Zero Oh

Ad d location Ad d new

All All of them

Confirmation prompts Confirmations prompts

Delete a nam e Delete

Langu age Select langu age

List nam es List all

List p aired p hon es List p hon es

Pager Beep er

Phone p airing PairingPhonebook Phone book

Ret u rn t o m a in m en u Re tu r n. M ain m en u

Select phone select

Set u p Phone settings p hone setup

The seating options available in

extensive customer research an

WARNIN




injured or killed.

Do not allow people to rid


Be sure everyone in your veusing a seat belt properly.

40-20-40 Front Seat Each outboard seat is independ




As the na me imp lies, the seat is divided into 3 segments.

The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total

width of the seat. The back of the center portion (20%)

easily folds down to provide an armrest/ center storage

compartment (if equipped).

or backward and is equipped w

manual seat adjustment handle

of each seat cushion. Pull up on

seat to get the most comfortabl

WARNIN

Adjusting a seat while the

dangerous. The sudden move

cause you to lose control. The

properly adjusted and you co

any seat only while the vehic

Reclining Seats WARNIN




The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.

Pull up on the handle to release the seat back and adjust

for comfort.

WARNIN

You can be seriously, even fat

seat with the seatback recline

seatback reclined so that thlonger resting against your ch

position, the shoulder harn

restraining you. In a collision

the se at belt and receive se

Recline in a seat only when t

Adjustable Head Restraints

Head restraints can reduce the rthe event of impact from the re

on the restraints so that the u

practical, at least to the level of

To lower the head restraint, push in the button and then Manual Rotary Lumbar Supp




push down on the head restraint. EquippedRotating the lumbar control kn

driver’s seatback an d on th e rig

seatback increases or decreases

Manual Lumbar A

Power Seats — If Equipped




CAUTION!

Do n’t put anything unde r a power seat. It may causedamage to the seat controls.

The power seat controls are on

front seat cushions. Three switch

ment. The four-way switch in

forward or backwards to get th

tion. The same switch can be

Up, Down, Forward,

control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the

l i h il i i d

Heated Seats — If EquippedTh h d i h l




two toggle switches, tilting it up or down. The heated seat switches are lo

panel under the climate control

Each heated seat switch has two

Press the switch once to obtai

press the sw itch ag ain to obtain

Tilt Adjustment

Heated Seat S

the switch a third time will turn the heated seats OFF. If

d t f ll t th it h OFF th tWARNIN




you do not purposefully turn the switch OFF, the seat

heating level will automatically change to the next lower

level, or OFF. The H igh hea t level operates for 30 minu tes

(approximate), the Low heat level operates for 30 min-utes (approximate). The seat heat will also turn OFF

when the ignition is turned OFF. Both of the indicators

ON identifies High heat level. The lower indicator On

only, iden tifies Low heat level. Flashing indicator lights

on the sw itch ind icate that the H eated Seat System need s

servicing.

Persons w ho are unable to

because of advanced age, ch

spinal cord injury, medicatiotion or other physical condit

when using the seat heater. It

at low temperatures, especi

periods of time.

Do not place anything on t

against heat, such as a blanke

cause the seat heater to overh

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD released you must reach into

center of the grille and push up




To op en the hood, tw o latches mu st be released. First pu ll

the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at

t he bas e of t he ins tr um ent panel. O nce t he hood is

center of the grille and push up

safety catch before raising the h

To prevent p ossible damage, d

close it. Use a firm downward pthe hood to ensure that both la

Hood Release Lever

Secondary L

WARNING! LIGHTS




If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up w hen

the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.

Be sure all hood latches are latched fully beforedriving.

Headlight Switch

Interior Lights open and the interior lights are

control all the way dow n to the




Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front

doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating

wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the

upward detent position, or if equipped, w hen the UN-

LOCK button is pressed on the key fob. When a door is

control all the way dow n to the

the interior lights to go out. T

Party mod e because it allows t

extended periods of time withocle’s battery.

The brightness of the instrume

regulated by rotating the d imme

down (dimmer). When the hea

supplement the brightness of t

eter, radio and overhead consol

up until you hear a click. Th

“Parade” mode and is useful quired during the day.

C lub C ab/ Q uad C ab m odels

switched dome lamp that may

the lens.

Dimmer Control

Battery SaverTo protect the life of your vehicle’s battery Load Shed-

Headlamp DelayTo aid in your exit your veh




To protect the life of your vehicle s battery, Load Shed-

ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.

If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 10

minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 10minu tes, the interior lights will autom atically turn off.

If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled

off, the exterior lights w ill au tomatically turn off after 8

minutes. If the headlamps are turned on and left on for 8

minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will

autom atically turn off.

NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition isON .

To aid in your exit, your veh

headlamp delay that will leave

seconds. This delay is initiate

turned OFF while the headlam

the headlamp switch is cycled

be cancelled by either turning t

then OFF or by turning the ign

Headlights, Parking Lights, When the headlight swi

position, the parking ligh

lights, license plate ligh

lights are all turned on. The hwhen the switch is rotated to th

To minimize the possibility of s

reducing light output avoid wi




Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lensesthat are lighter an d less susceptible to stone breakage

than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

reducing light output, avoid wi

remove road dirt, wash with a

lowed by rinsing.

Do n ot u se abrasive cleaning cowool or other abrasive material

Daytime Running Lights (CaVehicles)The headlights on your vehicle

engine is started and the tran

except park. This p rovides a co

dition u ntil the ignition is turn e

nate at less than 50% of normalbrake is applied the Daytime R

off.

Light Switch Rotation

Lights-on ReminderIf the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left

Cargo Light — If Equipped




If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left

on, after the ignition is turned off, a chime will sound

when the driver’s door is opened.

Fog Lights — If EquippedThe foglights are turned ON by placing the head-

light rotary control in the parking light or head-

light position and pushing in the headlight rotary

control. The fog lights will operate only when the parking

lights are ON or wh en the vehicle headlights are ON low

beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster

will illum inate wh en th e fog lights are on. The fog lights

will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,

wh en the h eadlight switch is rotated to the OFF position,

or the high beam is selected.The cargo lights are t urned

CARGO button. The interior

when the cargo lights are on. T

turn on for 30 second s wh en a k

as part of the illuminated entry

Cargo Light S

Multifunction Control LeverThe multifunction control lever is located on the left side




of the steering column.

Turn Signals

Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand orleft-hand turn.

The arrow on either side of the instrum ent cluster flashes

to indicate the direction of the turn, and prop er operation

of the front and rear turn signal lights. If a defective bulb

or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the

arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate. If an ind icator

fails to light w hen the lever is m oved, it would suggest

that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.

You can s ignal a lane change by m oving t he lever

partially up or down.

Turn Signal Auto-ModeTap the multi-function control

signal (left or right) will flash 3

turn off.

Turn Signal

Passing Light

You can signal another v ehicle with you r h eadlights by




g y g y

partially p ulling the m ultifun ction lever toward the steer-

ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to

turn on until the lever is released.

High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch

Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the

steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or

LOW beam.

High Beam / Lo

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield Wipers

Intermittent Wiper System

The intermittent feature of this




Windshield Wipers

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the

mu ltifunction control lever. Turn the end of the h and le to

select the desired wiper speed.

use w hen w eather conditions m

with a variable pause betwee

maximum delay between cycles

into the upper end of the delay

The delay interval decreases as

it enters the LOW continual sp

can be regulated from a maxim

between cycles, to a cycle eve

intervals will double in duratio

is 10 mph (16 km) or less.

Windshield Wiper / Washer Switch

WARNING! desired. If the washer knob is

delay range, the wiper will ope




Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to an accident. You might not see other

vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of

the windshield during freezing weather, warm the

windshield with defroster before and during wind-

shield washer use.

Windshield WashersTo use the w asher, push in on the washer kn ob on the end

of the mu ltifunction control lever and hold w hile spray is

after the washer knob is release

intermittent interval previously

knob is pushed, for a period gre

in the OFF p osition, the wiper

three wipes, after the wash kno

To prevent freeze-up of your w

in cold weather, select a solution

exceeds the temperature rang

rating information can be foun

containers.

TILT STEERING COLUMNTo tilt the column, pull rearward on the lever below the

WARNIN




turn signal control and move the wheel up or down, as

desired. Push th e lever forward to lock the colum n firmly

in place.

Tilting the steering column

moving is dangerous. Withou

umn, you could lose control o

an accident. Adjust the colu

hicle is stopped. Be sure it is

Tilt Steering Control Lever

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDWhen engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-

To ActivatePush the ON/ OFF button to




tion at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for

the speed for your specific engine). The controls are

mounted on the steering w heel.

instrument cluster, the word “CR

the system is on.

To Set At A Desired SpeedWhen the vehicle has reached

and release the SET button. Re

the vehicle will operate at the s

To DeactivateA soft tap on the brake pedal,

pressure w hile slowing the vehi

CEL button will deactivate spee

the memory. Pushing the ON/position or turning off the ignit

WARNING! Tapping the ACCEL button on

increase (refer to the table belo




Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is

dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to

cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose

control and have an accident. Always leave the

system OFF when you aren’t using it.

To Resume SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, push and release the

RESUME button. Resume can be u sed at an y speed above

(refer to the table below for the speed for your specific

engine).

To Vary The Speed SettingWhen the speed control is on, speed can be increased by

pr es sing and holdi ng t he A CC EL butt on. When t he

button is released, a new set speed will be established.

specific engine). Each time the

increases so that tapping the

increase speed by three increme

Tapping the DECEL button on

decrease (refer to the table belo

specific engine). Each time the

will decrease. For example, ta

will decrease the speed by 3 tim

table below (refer to the table

your specific engine).

To decrease speed while the spand hold the DECEL button. Re

desired speed is reached, and th

Fu nctions 5.7L Engine

Engage Sp eed 25 m p h (40 km / h)




g g p p ( )

Minim u n RESUME Speed 20 m p h (32 km / h)

ACCEL Increase 1 m ph (2 km / h)

DECEL Decrease 1 m ph (2 km / h)Drop ou t Speed 20 m p h (32 km / h)

To Accelerate For PassingDepress the accelerator as you wou ld norm ally. When th e

ped al is released, the vehicle w ill return to the set sp eed.

NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000

feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded

(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below theSET speed. If the vehicle speed drop s below (refer to the

table below for the speed for your specific engine), the

speed control will automatically disengage. If this hap-

pens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to

maintain the desired speed.

Vehicles equipped with a 5–spe

should be operated in 4th gear

conditions.

Vehicles equipped with a Auto

exhibit several downshifts und

To reduce the frequency of thprove vehicle performance, it

overdrive by p ressing th e “TOW

at the end of the gear shifter.

WARNING!

S d C l b d h h




Speed Control can be dangerous where the system

can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could

go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose

control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use

Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are

winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE— IF EQUIPPEDThe two optional overhead consoles m ay consist of the

following features:

• Courtesy/ Reading Lights

• Compass/ Temperature Mini

— If Equipped

• Universal Garage Door Open

Overhead Consol

Courtesy/Reading LightsIn the middle of the console are two courtesy/ reading

li ht

OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITHCOMPASS/TEMPERATURE M

IF EQUIPPED




lights.

Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is

opened, w hen t he di m m er contr ol is r ot at ed t o t hecourtesy light position (fully upward position), or when

the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless

Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also

operated individually as reading lights by pressing the

recessed area of the corresponding lens.

NOTE: The courtesy/ reading lights will remain on un til

the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have

been tu rned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interiorlights are left on after th e vehicle is tu rned off, they will

extinguish after 15 minutes.

— IF EQUIPPEDThis optional overhead console

•Courtesy Lights

• Compass/ Temp erature Mini

This overhead console allows you to choose between a

compass/ temperature d isplay and one of four trip con-

ditions being monitored

RESET Button




ditions being monitored.

US/M Button

Use this button to change th e d isplay from U.S. to metric

measurement u nits.

Use this button to reset the follAverage Fuel Economy (AVG E

Trip Odometer (ODO)

Elapsed time (ET)

Global ResetIf the RESET button is pressed twice within 2 seconds

while in any of the 3 resettable displays (AVG ECO

Average Fuel Economy (AVGShows the average fuel econo

Aver age fuel econom y is a r




while in any of the 3 resettable displays (AVG ECO,

ODO, ET), the Global Reset will reset all 3 displays.

Step Button

Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip

conditions.

Aver age fuel econom y is a r

amount of fuel u sed and the

traveled.

When the fuel economy is reset

tarily blank. Then, th e history in

and the averaging w ill continue

the reset.

Distance To Empty (DTE)Shows the estimated distance t

the fuel remaining in th e tank. T

determined by w eighted averaand average fuel economy, acco

tank level. This is n ot resettable

NOTE: Significant changes in

loading will greatly a ffect the a

the vehicle, regardless of the D

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated

driving distance, the DTE display will change to an

alternating test display of “LO” and “FUEL” This dis-

Trip Odometer (ODO)This display shows the distanc

reset Resetting of this screen wi




alternating test display of LO and FUEL . This dis-

play will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel.

Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will

turn off the “LO FUEL” text and a new DTE value will bedi splayed, bas ed on t he cur rent values in t he D TE

calculation and the current fuel tank level.

NOTE: It is possible for DTE to display “LO FUEL”

before the low fuel warning light turns on in the instru-

ment cluster. This could occur because low fuel w arning

is set to a specified fuel tank volume and DTE is an

estimated distance calculation based on fuel economy

and remaining fuel tank volume.

Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:

• 34 gallons - short box models

• 35 gallons - long box models

reset. Resetting of this screen wi

to change to Zero.

Elapsed Time (ET)This display shows the accum

since the last reset. Resetting the

the d isplay to change to Zero.

C/T Button WARNIN

Even if the display still read




Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem-perature and one of eight compass head ings that indicate

the d irection in w hich the vehicle is facing.

Even if the display still read

32°F ( 0°C), the road surface m

in woods or on bridges. D riv

conditions to prevent an acci

sonal injury or property dam

Automatic Compass CalibraThis compass is self-calibratin

need to manually set the comp

new, t he com pas s m ay appea

symbol will be displayed.

After comp leting u p to three 36

traveling less than 5 mph (8 km

large metal or metallic objects, t

off and the compass will functi

Manual Compass Calibration

NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, m ake




sure the compass variance is properly set before manu -

ally calibrating the compass.

If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol doesnot app ear, you m ust manu ally p ut the compass into the

“Calibration” mode.

Recalibrating The CompassTurn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/

Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to

change the display betw een VAR (comp ass variance) and

CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-

bol is displayed complete one 360° turn in an area freefrom large metal objects or power lines. The CAL symbol

will turn off and the compass will function normally.

Compass Variance is the diffe

north a nd geographic north. In sthe d ifference between magn etic

great enough to cause the comp

If this occurs, the compass varia

to the Compass Variance Map.

NOTE: The default for the com

To set the variance: Turn the i

di l “C / T




display to “Compass/ Temperat

RESET button approximately fiv

ance zone number will be disbutton to select the new varia

RESET button to resume norma

Outside TemperatureBecause the ambient temperatu

derhood , engine temp erature ca

temperature, therefore, tempera

updated when the vehicle spe

km/ h) or during stop and go d

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDThe HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to

three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-




( ) p

ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized

gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the

push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries

are needed.

For additional information on 355–3515, or on the internet at

HomeLink Program

WARNING!

A moving garage door can cause injury to peo ple and

WARNIN

Vehicle exhaust contains carb




g g g j y p p

pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be

seriously or fatally in jured. Only use this transceiver

with a garage door opener that has a “stop andreverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-

dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-

els manufactured after 1982. D o not use a garage

door opener without these safety features it could

cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515

or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety

information or assis tance.

ous gas. D o not run the v

training the transceiver. Exha

ous injury or death.

WARNIN

Your motorized door or gat

while you are training the Un

not train the transceiver if pe

path of the door or gate. A mcause serious injury or death

damage to objects.

Programming HomeLink

NOTE: When p rogramming a garage d oor opener, it is

advised to park outside the garage It is also recom




advised to park outside the garage. It is also recom-

mended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held

t ra ns mit te r o f t he d e vice b ein g p ro gr am m ed t oHomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmis-

sion of the radio-frequency signal.

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink bu ttons, and

release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after

20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30

seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second

and/ or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two

HomeLink buttons. 2. Position the end of your hinches (3-8 cm) away from the

keeping the indicator light in vi

Outer HomeLin

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink

button that you want to train and the hand-held trans-

mitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4

NOTE: To p rogram the remai

tons, begin with Programming

step one.




has been completed.

NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openersmay requ ire you to replace this Programm ing Step 3 with

procedures noted in the Gate Operator/ Canadian Pro-

gramming section.

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and

then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the

frequency signal from the hand -held transmitter. Release

both buttons after the indicator light changes from the

slow to the rapid flash.5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink bu tton and

observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on

constantly, programming is complete and your device

should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed

and released.

If the ind icator light blinks rapi

then turns to a constant light, ming steps 6-8 to complete the

code equipped device (most c

opener).

6. At the garage door opener re

in the garage, locate the learn

can usually be found where the

attached to the motor-head uni

7. Firmly press and release the(The name and color of the bu

facturer.)

NOTE: There are 30 seconds

eight.

8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two

seconds and release the programmed HomeLink bu tton.

Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time,

Similar to this Canadian law, som

designed to time-out in the sa

If you live in Canada or you




and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener

(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this

sequence a third time to complete the programming.

H om eLink s hould now act ivate your r olling code

equipped device.

NOTE: To p rogram the remaining two H omeLink but-

tons, begin with Programming step two. Do not repeat

step one. For questions or comments, please contact

HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

Canadian Programming/Gate ProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-

nals t o time-out (or quit) after several seconds of

t ra ns mis sio n w h ich m a y n ot b e lo ng e no u gh fo r

HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.

If you live in Canada or you

programming a gate operator

ming procedures (regardless of

Programming HomeLink step

NOTE: If programming a gar

operator, it is advised to unplu

cycling process to prevent pos

3. Continue to p ress and hold

while you press and release ev

your h and -held tran smitter unti

successfully been accepted by Hlight will flash slowly and the

Programming step four to com

Using HomeLinkTo operate, simply p ress and release the p rogrammed

HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the

seconds. HomeLink is now i

mode and can be programme

with Programming - step 2




trained device (i.e. garage d oor opener, gate op erator,

security system, entry door lock, home/ office lighting,

etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of thedevice may also be used at any time. In the event that

there are still p rogramming difficulties or questions,

contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-

3515.

Erasing HomeLink ButtonsTo erase programm ing from the three buttons (individu al

buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed -

note below), follow the step noted:

• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink bu ttons until

the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.

Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30

Reprogramming a Single HoTo program a device to Home

button previously trained, follo

1. Press and hold the desired

N OT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin

Without releasing the HomeLi

Programming step 2

For ques tions or com m ent s, www.homelink.com or 1-800-35

SecurityIf you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase th e frequencies.

To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold

HomeLink is a trademark own

Inc.

POWER SUNROOF IF EQ




To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold

down both outside buttons until the green light begins to

flash.

This device complies with p art 15 of FCC rules and with

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.

• This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that m ay cause u nd es-

ired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap -

proved by the p arty responsible for compliance could

void the u ser’s au thority to operate the equipment.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQThe power sunroof switch is l

visors on the overhead console

NOTE: The Power Accessory

the power sunroof to operate f

ignition is turned off.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

Open Sunroof - Express MoMomentarily pressing the switc

the Express Open Feature, cau

i ll D i h E




children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for

a number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keysin the ignition. A child could operate power

window s, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being

thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You

could also be seriously injured or killed. Always

fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all

passengers are properly secured too.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sun-roof. N ever allow fingers or other body parts, or

any object to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

automatically. During the Expr

movement of the switch will sto

remain in a partial open positipressing the switch rearward w

Open Feature.

Comfort Stop

The sunroof is equipped with a

Stop” position. This is the firs

reaches. This is designed to re

vehicle speeds between 20 - 4

Pressing the switch m omentar

open the sunroof to its full ope

buffeting can occur at full open

Closing Sunroof - ExpressPress the switch forward and release, and the sunroof

will close automatically from any position. The sunroof

ill l f ll d t t ti ll Thi i ll d

NOTE: Pinch protection is dis

pressed.

Venting Sunroof - Express




will close fully and stop automatically. This is called

Express Close. During Express Close operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Pinch Protect FeatureThis feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-

struction in the path of the sunroof is d etected, the

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-

tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and

release to Express Close.

Pinch Protect OverrideIf a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,

press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after

the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move

towards the closed position.

g pPress and release the V butt

op en to th e vent position. This i

will occur regardless of sunroof

Vent op eration, any movem ent o

sunroof.

Sunshade OperationThe sunshade can be opened

sunshade will open automatica

NOTE: The sunshade cannot b

open.

Wind BuffetingWind buffeting can be d escribed as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the

ear Yo r ehicle ma e hibit ind b ffeting ith the

Sunroof Fully ClosedPress the switch forward and r

sunroof is fully closed.




ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting w ith the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-rence and can be m inimized. If the bu ffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs

with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to

minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof MaintenanceUse only a non-abrasive cleaner an d a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTL

The auxiliary electrical outlet ccab accessories designed for use

lighter” plug. The outlet is lo

panel below and to the right

Panel. A cap is attached to th

“Power Outlet” 12V-20A.

There is an ad ditional Power Ou

of a 40/ 20/ 40 seat (if equipped

The outlet(s) has/ have a fusebattery so it/ they receive powe

ON or OFF.

All accessories connected to this/ these outlet(s) shou ld

be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use

to protect the battery against discharge.

CAUTIO

Electrical Outlet Use With En




NOTE: If desir ed, all of t he pow er outlets can be

converted by your authorized dealer to provide power

with the ignition switch in the ON position only.

• Many accessories that can

power from the vehicle’s b

in use (i.e. cellular phoneplugged in long enough, th

discharge sufficiently to

and/or prevent engine star

• Accessories that draw high

vacuum cleaners, lights, e

battery even more quickly

mittently and w ith greater

• After the use of high powe

long pe riods o f the vehicle

accessories still plugged in

driven a sufficient length

generator to recharge the v

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVERThe removable ash receiver is located in the instrument

panel cup holder tray.




The cigar l ighter is located on the instrument panel,

above and to the left of the ash receiver.

As a child safety p recaution, the lighter only operates

with the ignition switch ON. It heats when p ushed in and

pops out au tomatically w hen ready for u se. To preserve

the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the

heating position.

CUPHOLDERS

Front Instrument Panel CupholdersTo secure the cup, p lace the cup to be held into one of the

Rear Cupholder — Quad CaQuad Cab vehicles may be eq

holder that consists of two cup

convenience




cup wells and then push the cupholder arm toward the

cup until it is held stable.

convenience.

STORAGE

Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped

configure the storage area into

amp le, compartm ents can be con

computer, a cellular telephone,

items The top of the cover p




The center portion of the seat folds down to p rovide an

armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid.

Push the button on the front of the armrest to raise the

cover. Inside there is a power outlet (if equipped),

removable coin holder (if equipp ed), and tw o d ividers to

items. The top of the cover p

surface to serve as a desktop fo

WARNIN

• This armrest is not a seat.

armrest could be seriously

operation, or an accident

seating position w hen the a

• In an accident, the latch

weight of the items stored(4.5 kg). These items co

endangering occupants o

stored should not exceed a

Storage and Seats — If EquippedLocated in th e center of the front 40/ 20/ 40 seat cushion

there is a storage compartment.

d d b d l l h b hi d h




Standard cab models also have storage behind the seat.

The Quad Cab models provide add itional storage un derthe rear seat. Lift the seat to access the storage compart-

ment.

Quad Cab St

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped

Th El i R Wi d D f d H d

Power Sliding Rear Window




The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated

side view mirrors are activated by pressing the

heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,

with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will

deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and

Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also

turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.

To reactivate, simply press the button again.

The power sliding rear window

instrument panel below the cl

right side of the switch to op en

of the switch to close the glass.

Power Sliding Rear W

Sliding Rear Window—If EquippedA locking device in the center of the window helps to

prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the

lock to release the window.




FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPEDQ uad C ab m odels w it h a 60/ 40 r ear s eat, m ay be

equipped with a folding load floor.

Quad Cab Rear 6

WARNING!

Do not operate the vehicle with loo se items stored on

the load floor. While driving or in an accident you

Unfolding the Load Floor

1. Lift the 60/ 40 seat cushion(s




g y

may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,

or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floormay move around with force and strike occupants,

resulting in serious or fatal injury.

Unfolding The L

2. Grasp the knob on th e load floor and lift the knob un til

the load floor unfolds into position.

Positioning the Load Floor for

the Seat

1. Lift the 60/ 40 seat cushion(s




3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.

2. Unsnap the securing snap loc

load floor.3. Lift the load floor up to acce

floor.

Load Floor In Open Position

WARNING!

Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.

When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor




pp g

could move to the down position causing serious

injury.

4. Reverse the procedu re to put

secured down position before y

Load Floor Secur

PICKUP BOX You can carry wide building

wood , etc.) by building a raised

across the box in the indentat

wheel housings and in the bulkh




The pickup box on your new Ram has many features

designed for utility and convenience.

NOTE: If you are installing a toolbox to the front of the

pickup box, you m us t us e Mopar toolbox brackets

available from you r dealer

floor.

WARNIN

The pickup box is intended

poses only, not for passeng

seats and use seat belts.

Pickup Box Features

WARNING!

• Care sho uld alw ays be exercised w hen o perating a

vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle spe eds

There are stampings in the shee

bulkheads of the box in front o

housings. Place wooden boards

to side to create separate loa




may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough

roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargothat may result in vehicle damage. If wide build-

ing materials are to be frequently carried, the

installation of a support is recommended. This

will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the

pickup box floor.

• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of

material suspended above the wheelhouse, sup-

ports must be installed to transfer the weight of

the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damagemay result. The use of proper supports w ill pe rmit

loading up to the rated payload.

• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an

accident causing serious or fatal injury.

pickup box.

There are four tie-down cleats bthe pickup box that can sustain

kg) total.

SLIDE-IN CAMPERSDO NOT use slide-in campers o

EASY-OFF TAILGATEThe tailgate can be removed qui

sometimes required for pickupthe tailgate unlatch the tailgate

cables by releasing the lock ta

rotate and pull away from the b

free, move to the right side of th

Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side

pivot clears the hanger bracket. Slide the entire tailgate to

the right to free the left side pivot. Remove the tailgate

from th e veh icle entirely. Do not carr y th e tailgate loose in

h k i k b




the truck pickup box.

NOTE: Dual rear wheel pickup m odels require properlyspaced rear clearance lights. If such a vehicle is operated

without a tailgate, suitable lights must be installed.

WARNIN



i i i




SAFETY TIPS

Transporting PassengersThis vehicle is designed to carry passengers in the cab

only. For safety reasons, NEVER TRANSPORT PASSEN-

GERS IN THE CARGO AREA.


injured or killed.Do not allow people to rid


Be sure everyone in your ve

using a seat belt properly.

Lock Your VehicleAlways remove the keys from

doors when leaving the vehicle own driveway or garage. Try t

well-lighted area and never in

ticles of value exposed.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

E h t t i b id t

• The best protection against

into the vehicle body is a pro

exhaust system.

Be aware of changes in the soun




Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a poten-

tially toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless.To avoid inhaling these gases, the following precau-

tions should be observed:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined

areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in

or out of the area.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for more than a short period, adjustyour climate control system to force outside air into

the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the

controls in any position except OFF or MAX A/ C.

g

exhaust fumes detected inside t

the underside or rear of the vemechanic inspect the complete

cent body areas for broken, d

mispositioned parts. Open sea

could permit exhaust fumes to

compartment. In add ition, ins

each time the vehicle is raise

change. Replace or adjust as re

Safety Checks You Should MVehicle

Heater Defroster Ducts

Inspect the heater defroster du

Check for proper air flow throu

there are any question regarding the operation of your

heater defroster d ucts, have the system checked by an

authorized dealer

Seat Belts

on while driving, have the syst

rized dealer. If there is a problem

seatbelt light will flash.

Safety Checks You Should M




Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replacedimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if

they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,

etc.) or if the front airbags have dep loyed. If there is any

question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the

belt.

Airbag LightThe light s hould com e on and r em ain on for 6 t o 8

seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned ON. If the light is not lit du ring starting, see your

authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes

yVehicle

Tires

Examine tires for tread wear o

Check for stones, nails, glass o

the tread.

Inspect for tread cuts or sidew

nuts for tightness and tires for

Lights

Check the operation of all extsignal and high beam indicator

panel.

Door Latches

Check for p ositive closing, latch

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are

detected the cause should be located and corrected.




UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT

CONTENTS



CONTENTS

Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ Electrical Distur bances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . .

▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . .

Sales Code REF — AM/ FM/

Radio With Optional Satellit

Free Ph one Capability . . . .

▫ Operating Instructions - Ra

▫ Operation Instructions - C

▫ Operation Instructions - Au

▫ Operating Instructions - H

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Sales Code RAQ – AM/ FM/ CD (6-Disc) Radio

With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,

Sales Code RAK – AM/ FM/ C

Radio With Op tional Satellite

Phone, Video, MP3, And WM

▫ Operating Instructions - Ra

168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL



And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)

Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . .191

▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD

Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

▫ Load/ Eject Button (CD Mod e For CD Aud io

Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3

Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

▫ Load/ Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . .202

▫ Operating Instructions — T

▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . .

▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . .

▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Changing Tape Direction .

▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . .

▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . .

▫ Noise Redu ction . . . . . . .

▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD

Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

▫ Load/ Eject Button (CD Mod e For CD Aud io

Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

▫ System Activation . . . . . .

▫ Electronic Serial Number/ S

Nu mber (ESN/ SID) . . . . .

▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3

And WMA Aud io Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

▫ Load/ Eject Button (CD Mod e For MP3 And

WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Sales Code REC — AM/ FM/ CD (6–Disc) Radio

With Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Selecting Satellite Mode In

Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . .

▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-

▫ Using The PTY (Program T

Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ PTY Button Scan . . . . . .

▫ PTY Button Seek . . . . . .

▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . .

▫ Reception Quality . . . . . .

Remote Sound System Contr

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225

C tt T A d Pl M i t 225

▫ Heater Only — Fleet Vehic

▫ Air Conditioning And Hea

▫ Air Conditioning With Dua

Control — If Equipped . .




Cassette Tape An d Player Maintenance . . . . . . .225

Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 227

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

q pp

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . .

▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . .

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



INSTRUMENT CLUSTER




INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION

1. Check Gages

This light illuminates when the Voltmeter, Engine

Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Temperature

gages indicate a reading either too high or too low

the pointer moves to either ex

remains there during normal dr

tem should be serviced.

NOTE: If the gauge pointer m

the gauge the “Check Gages”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



gages indicate a reading either too high or too low.

Examine the gages carefully, and follow the instructionsabove for each indicated problem.

NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the

Fuel Gage, Voltmeter, Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant

Temperature gages may not show accurate readings.

When the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch

to ON to obtain accurate readings.

2. Voltage Gauge

When the engine is running, the gauge indicates

the electrical system voltage. The pointer should

stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If

the gauge, the Check Gages

and a single chime will sounindicator may also illuminate p

moving out of normal ran ge. In

authorized Dealer for system se

3. Turn Signal Indicat ors

Lights in instrument cluster f

signals are operating.

4. Tachomet er

The tachometer indicates engine

minute.

CAUTION!

Do not operate the engine with the tachometer

pointer at high rpm for extended periods. Engine

damage may occur.

unbu ckled, a chime will sound

when driving, if the driver seat

the Seat Belt Warning Light

continu ously. Refer to Enhanc

minder System (BeltAlert™) in




g y

5. Airbag Indicator Light

The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds

when the ignition is first turned on. If the light stays on,

flickers or comes on while driving, have the airbag

system checked by an authorized dealer.

6. High Beam Indicator

This indicator shows that headlights are on high

beam.

7. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this

light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.

During the bulb check if the driver’s seat belt is

section for more information.

information.)

8. Speedometer

The speedometer shows the ve

hour and/ or kilometers per ho

9. Oil Pressure Gauge

The pointer should alway

sure when the engine is

high or low reading, under normay indicate a lubrication syste

ate service should be obtained.

information.)

NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of

the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate

and a single chime will sound.

10. Transfer Case Position

(See p age 258 for more information )

13. Temperat ure Gauge

The temperature gauge i

t em peratur e. A ny r ead

range indicates that the c

ing satisfactorily. The gauge nee

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



(See p age 258 for more information.)

11. TOW HAUL

The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear

shift lever. This light will illuminate w hen the TOW

HAUL OD/ OFF button is pushed once. (See page 254 for

more information.)

12. OD/OFF

the OD/ OFF button is located at the end of the gear shift

lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL

OD/ OFF button is p ushed twice. (See page 254 for more

information.)

higher temperature when driv

mountain grades, in heavy tr

trailer. If the needle rises to th

vehicle, shift into N (Neutral),

idle speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If

does not return to normal, shu

allow it to cool. Seek authorized

Cooling System information in

ing Your Vehicle.”

CAUTION!

Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the

engine running as you would not be able to react to

the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.

15. Transmission Range Indica

Tranmissions Only)

When the gear selector lever

shows the automatic transmissi

16. Odometer/Trip Odometer




p g

NOTE: Engine idle speed will automatically increase to

1000 rpm at elevated coolant temperatures to imp rove

engine cooling.

NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of

the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate

and a single chime will sound.

14. Securit y

The light will flash rapidly for app roximately 16 second s

when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will

flash at a slower rate after the alarm is set. The security

light w ill also come on for about two seconds when the

ignition is first turned ON

16. Odometer/Trip Odometer

The odometer shows the total been driven.

If the odometer reading is ch

replacement, be sure to keep

before and after the service so th

be d etermined.

The trip odometer shows ind

toggle between the odometer

press the Odometer/ Trip Odom

Trip Odometer, press and hold

mode, until the Trip Odometer

NOTE: The odometer/ trip odometer Vacuum Fluores-

cent Display will also may display GASCAP, which

indicates that you r gas cap is possibly loose or d amaged .

The Vacuum Fluorescent Display will also display NO-

FUSE, which indicates that the IOD fuse is removed from

17. Check Ga ges Light

This light is part of an o

wh ich m onitors the emi

system. If the vehicle

testing the light will come on w

d d i

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



FUSE, which indicates that the IOD fuse is removed from

the Integrated Power Module. (See p age 430 for moreinformation.)

NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This

indicates the total number of hours the engine h as been

runn ing. To d isplay the engine hours p erform th e follow-

ing: Place the ignition in RUN, but do not start the

engine. With the od ometer value d isplayed, hold the trip

button d own for a period of 6 second s. The od ometer will

change to trip value first, then it will display the enginehour value. The engine hours will be displayed for a

period of 30 second s un til the ignition is tu rned off or the

engine is started.

t ur ned on and r em ain on, as

engine is started. If the veh icle i

testing the light will come on w

turned on and remain on for 15

second s, and remain on un til th

bulb does not come on during

tion investigated prom ptly.

If this light comes on and rem

suggests a potential engine cont

for system service.

Although your vehicle will usu

need towing, see your dealer

possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

damage to the engine control system. It also could

affect fuel economy and driveability.

If t he l ight r em ains on w he

released, it indicates a possible

malfunction. In this case, the l

the cause is corrected.

If brake failure is indicated, imm




If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converterdamage and pow er loss will soon occur. Immediate

service is required.

18. Brake System Warning Light

This light illuminates when the ignition key is turned to

the ON position and remains on for a few seconds. If the

light stays on longer, it may be an indication that the

parking brake has not been released. This light willilluminate if the brake fluid is low, especially when

braking or accelerating h ard. This light will illuminate if

the ABS indicator light has a malfunction. This light will

flash if the engine is runn ing and the parking brake is on.

,

and continued operation of the vdangerous.

Acceleration which causes the

period of time may result in th

n a tin g a nd a b ra ke s w it ch c

equipped vehicles. Depressing

extinguish the red brake light.

19. ABS Warning Light

This light monitors the A

which is described elsew

light will come on when the ign

ON position an d may stay on fo

light remains on or comes on du

that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not

functioning and that service is required. See your autho-

rized dealer immediately. The ABS light could also

illuminate d uring loss of traction an d remain illum inated

until the brake p edal is pressed.

reduced performance, an elevat

stall and your vehicle may requ

come on when the ignition is fi

on for 15 seconds as a bulb che

come on during starting, have t

th i d d l

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



20. Cargo LightThe Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the Cargo

Lamp is activated by p ressing th e Cargo Light Button on

the headlight switch.

21. Electronic Throt t le Cont rol (ETC)

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-

lem is detected the light will come on while the

engine is running. If the light remains lit withthe engine run ning you r vehicle will usually be drivable,

however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.

If t he light is flashing w hen t he engine is r unning,

immediate service is required and you may experience

authorized dealer.

22. SERV 4WD Indicator

The 4WD indicator will be ill

4WD mode is engaged for eith

shift 4WD systems. The SERV

the electric shift 4WD system.

stays on or comes on during d

4WD system is not functioning

is required.

23. Front Fog Light Indicat or —

This light shows w hen th

24. Low Washer Fluid Light

This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls

below approximately 1/ 4 full. The light will remain on

until fluid is added and ignition switch is cycled.

25. Transmis sio n Oi l Temperat ure Warning Light

26. Odometer/Trip Odometer B

Press this button to toggle betw

trip odometer display. Holding

trip odometer reading when in

27. Fuel Gauge




p g g

(Automatic Transmissions Only)This light ind icates that there is excessive tran s-

mission fluid temperature that might occur

with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may

also occur w hen op erating the vehicle in a h igh

torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive

operation (e.g. snow plowing, off- road operation). If this

light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle

or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the

light goes off.

g

Show s level of fuel in tan k w heON position.

28. Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level drop

symbol will light and a si

NOTE: If your vehicle is equ

console module (CMTC), it is po

“LO FUEL” before the low fuel

the instrum ent cluster. This cou

fuel warning is set to a specifi

DTE is an estimated distance cal

fuel economy and remaining fu

Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:

• 34 gallons - short box models

• 35 gallons - long box models

29. Door Ajar

ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCThe clock and radio each use th

the radio. A digital readout sho

time in hours and minutes (d

model) whenever the ignition

“ACC” p osition

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



The Door Ajar light will illuminate when anydoor is opened. When the ignition is ON the

Door Ajar light will stay illuminated until the

open door is closed. When the ignition is OFF

the Door Ajar light will stay illuminated until the open

door is closed or the battery saver feature automatically

turns the light off.

30. CRUISE Light

This indicator lights wh en the electronic speed controlsystem is turned on.

ACC p osition.

When the ignition switch is in

when the radio frequency is bei

ing is accurately maintained.

On th e RAQ radio the time bu tt

of the time and frequency on t he

one of the two, time or frequen

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the time butt

2. Adjust the hours by turnin

Audio control.

3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune

/ Audio control to set the minutes.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio

control.

5 To exit press any bu tton/ knob or w ait approximately

Two Types of SignalsThere are two basic types of

Amplitud e Modu lation, in whic

causes the amplitude, or heigh

vary... and FM or Frequency M

frequency of the wave is varied




5. To exit, press any bu tton/ knob or w ait approximately

5 seconds.

RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION

Radio Broadcast SignalsYour new radio will provide excellent reception und er

most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car

radios have performance limitations, d ue to m obile op-

eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to

believe your sound system is m alfunctioning. To helpyou understand and save you concern about these “ap-

parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or

two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-

nals.

frequency of the wave is varied

Electrical DisturbancesRadio waves may pick up elect

transmission. They mainly aff

and t hus r em ain a par t of t

interfere very little with the f

carry the FM signal.

AM Reception

AM sound is based on wave amcan be disrup ted by su ch things

and neon signs.

FM ReceptionBecause FM transmission is based on frequen cy varia-

tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations

can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,

which is the major feature of FM radio.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if equipped), and 6 disc CD/ DVD changer (if equipped)

will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition

switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door

will cancel this feature.

SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO ANDHANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right

side of your radio faceplate.

Operating Instructions - Rad

NOTE: The ignition switch mposition to operate the radio.

REF Rad

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press

the ON/ VOL a second time to turn OFF the rad io.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

SEEK Button (Radio Mode)

Press and release the SEEK but

listenable station in either A

equipp ed) mod e. Press the right

up and the left side to seek dow

tuned to the new station until




degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning thevolume control to the right increases the volume and to

the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,

but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition

is ON.

Mode Button (Radio Mode)

Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the

CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).


tion. Holding the bu tton w ill stopping until you release it.

MUTE Button (Radio Mode)

Press the MUTE button to can

speakers. MUTE will display.

second time and the sound from

Rotating the volume control, tur

or turning ON/ OFF the ignitio

feature.

NOTE: In Hands Free Phone

MUTE button mutes the microp

SCAN Button (Radio Mode)

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for

the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite

(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each

listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop

the search, press SCAN a second time.


Audio control.

3. After the hours are adjust

Tun e/ Aud io control to set the m

begin to blink.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR




PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)

Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan

through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if

equipped) frequencies, pau sing for 5 seconds at each

preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the

search, press PSCAN a second time.

Time Button

Press the time bu tton and the time of day w ill display for5 seconds.


1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using thcontrol.

5. To exit, press any button/ kn

RW/FF (Radio Mode)

Pressing the rewind / fast forwar

to search for the next frequenc

arrows. This feature operates in

lite (if equipped) frequencies.TUNE Control (Radio Mode)

Turn the right side rotary contro

counter-clockwise to decrease th

AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)

Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS w ill display.

Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or

Press the rotary TUNE control a

display. Turn the TUNE contr

adjust the sound level between

ers.

Press the tune control again o




decrease the Bass tones.Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID

will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to

increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.

Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBw ill

display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to

increase or decrease the Treble tones.

Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL willdisplay. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to

adjust the soun d level from the right or left side speakers.

setting tone, balance, and fade.RND/SET Button (Radio Mod

Push-Button Memory

When you are r eceiving a s t

commit to push-button memor

The symbol SET 1 will now show

Select the bu tton (1-6) you w ish

and press and release that bu

selected within 5 seconds after the station will continue to pla

into push-button memory.

You may add a second station

repeating the above p rocedu re w

the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the d isplay

window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in

both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,

and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into

push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2

memory can be selected by pressing the push-button

Operation Instructions - CD

NOTE: The ignition switch m

position to operate the radio.

Inserting The Compact Disc

Gently insert one CD into the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



y y p g p

twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)

These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you

commit to pu sh-button m emory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12

Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

y

label facing up . The CD w ill autthe CD Player and the CD ico

radio display.

If the volume control is ON, th

mode and begin to play. The di

number and play time in minute

begin at the start of track one.

NOTE:• On some vehicles, you may i

the radio or ignition switch O

• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

OFF, the CD will automatically be p ulled into the CD

Player.

• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.

SEEK Button (CD Mode)

SCAN Button (CD Mode)

Press this button to play the first

To stop the scan function, press

EJECT Button (CD Mode)

Press this button and




Press the right side of the SEEK button for th e next track on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the

beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning

of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10

seconds of the current selection.

MUTE Button (CD Mode)

Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the

speakers. MUTE will display. Press the MUTE button a

second time and the sound from the speakers will return.Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition

will also return the sound from the speakers.

move to the entranceunit will switch to the

If you do not remove the disc wi

reloaded. The radio mode will

TIME Button (CD Mode)

Press this button to change the

playing time to time of day. The

for 5 seconds.RW/FF (CD Mode)

Press and hold the FF (Fast For

will begin to fast forward until

(Reverse) button works in a sim

RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD

Mode)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature p lays the selections on the

compact d isc in rand om order to provide an interesting

change of pace.

Operation Instructions - AuxThe auxiliary (AUX) jack is an

allows the user to plug in a po

MP3 p layer, cassette player, or

the vehicle’s audio system to am

through the vehicle speakers.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly

selected track.

Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the

tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward

feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will

reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random

Play.

The auxiliary mode becomes a

device is plugged into the AUX

mm stereo audio cable and the u

the MODE bu tton u ntil AUX ap

NOTE: The radio will return t

the ignition switch is turned fro

tion to the ACC position, the ra

radio w as p reviously in the AUSEEK Button (Auxiliary Mod

No function.

MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the

speakers. MUTE will display. Press the MUTE button a

second time and the sound from the speakers will return.

Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition

will also return the sound from the speakers.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mod

Press this button to change th

playing time to time of day. The

for 5 seconds.

RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)

No function




SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

EJECT Button (Auxili ary Mode )

No function.

PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)No function.

No function.

RND/SET Button (Auxiliary

No function.

Mode Button (Auxiliary Mod

Press the mode button repeated

CD player and Satellite Radio (

Operating Instructions - Han

EquippedRefer to the “HANDS FREE

section of the Owner’s Manual.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — IfEquippedRefer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s

Manual.

SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDSFREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right


Operating Instructions - Rad

NOTE: The ignition switch mposition to operate the radio.

RAQ Rad

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press

the ON/ VOL a second time to turn OFF the rad io.


The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the



listenable station in either A

equipp ed) mod e. Press the right

up and the left side to seek dow





degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the

volume control to the right increases the volume and to

the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,

but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition

is ON.


Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the

CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment

System (VES) (if equipped).

tion. Holding the bu tton w ill stopping until you release it.

MUTE Button (Radio Mode)


speakers. MUTE will be disp

button a second time and the s

will return. Rotating the volu

radio ON/ OFF, or turning OF

return the sound from the spea

NOTE: In Hands Free Phone

MUTE button mutes the microp



the n ext listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if

equipped) frequencies, pau sing for 5 seconds at each

listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop



Audio control.

3. After the hours are adjusted,

/ Audio control to set the mi

begin to blink.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)

Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one

with call letters d isplayed). The rad io will return a Radio

Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode

only).

Time Button

P re ss t he t im e b u tt on a nd t he t im e o f d a y w ill b e

displayed for 5 seconds.


1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using thecontrol.


RW/FF (Radio Mode)

Pressing the rewind / fast forwar

to search for the next frequenc

arrows. This feature operates in

lite (if equipped) frequencies.

TUNE Control (Radio Mode)

Turn the right side rotary contro

counter-clockwise to decrease th






decrease the Bass tones.




ers.


balance and fade.




Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID



Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE


increase or decrease the Treble tones.

Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL-

ANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or

left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side

speakers.

RND/PTY Button (Radio Mo

Pressing this button once will t

5 seconds. If no action is taken

out th e PTYicon will turn off. P

turning the TUNE rotary kno

allow th e program format type t

stations do not currently broadc

Toggle the PTY button to select the following format

types:

Program Type16 Digit-Character Dis-

play

No program type or un-defined

None

N ostalgia

Old ies

Personality

Public

Rh yth m a nd Blu es

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Ad u lt H its Ad u lt_H its

Alert Alert Alert Alert

Classical Classical

Classic Rock Classic_Rock

College College

Country Cou ntry

Em ergen cy Test Em ergen cy Test

Foreig n La ng ua ge Fo reig n_La ng ua geInform ation Inform ation

Jazz Jazz

N ew s N ew s

Religiou s Mu sic Religiou s Talk

Rock

Soft

Soft Rock

So ft Rh yth m a nd Blu es

Sports

Talk

Top 40

Weather

By pressing the SEEK button

displayed, the rad io will be tun

station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY

function only operates w hen in the FM mod e.

If a preset bu tton is activated w hile in the PTY (Program

Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio

will tune to the preset station.

display window. Each button c

SET 2 in bot h AM an d FM. This

FM and 12 Satellite (if equipp ed)

push-button memory. The sta

memory can be selected by p

twice.




SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set thePush-Button Memory

When you are r eceiving a s tation t hat you w i sh t o

commit to push-button memory, press the SET/ DIR

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this

station and press and release that button. If a button is

not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/ DIR

button, the station will continue to p lay but will not be

stored into push-button memory.

You may add a second station to each pu sh-button by

repeating the abov e p rocedu re with this exception: Press

the SET/ DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the

Every time a preset button i

button number will be displaye

Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)

These buttons tune the Radio

commit to pu sh-button m emor


Operation Instructions - (CD

Play)

NOTE: The ignition switch m


NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of p laying compact

discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable

compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks

and mu ltisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Di sc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD

If you insert a disc with the ig

ON, the unit will switch from

begin to play when you insert t

show the disc number, the track

in minutes and seconds. Play w

track 1.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



label facing up . The CD w ill autom atically be pu lled into

the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display.

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

You may eject a disc with the r adio OFF.

SEEK Button (CD MODE for

Press the right side of the SE

selection on the CD. Press the

return to the beginning of the cu

to the beginning of the previou

within the first 10 second s of th

MUTE Button (CD MODE fo


speakers. MUTE will be disp

button a second time and the s

will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the

radio ON/ OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also

return the sound from the speakers.

SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the

CD currently playing.

Radio display will show LOAD

is loading, and “READING D

reading the disc.

LOAD / EJT - Eject

Press the LOAD/ EJ

button with the corre




LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD AudioPlay)

LOAD/ EJECT - Load

Press the LOAD/ EJECT button an d the p ush-

button with the corresponding number where

the CD is being loaded. The radio will display

PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT

DISC. After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert theCD into the player.

the CD was loaded a

and move to the ent

Radio display will show EJECT

is being ejected and prompt the

Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT

all CDs will be ejected from the

If you h ave ejected a d isc and ha

15 seconds, it will be reloaded . the radio will continue to play

the CD is removed and there are

the radio will play the next CD

If the CD is removed and there

radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display

INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted

within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be dis-

played.

On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and

ignition OFF.

AM/FM Button (CD MODE

Switches the Radio to the Radi

RND/PTY Button (Random P

MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press this button while the C

Random Play. This feature p la

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press and h old FF (Fast Forward ) and the CD p layer will

begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or

another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button

works in a similar manner.

TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,

Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.

compact d isc in rand om order

change of pace.

Press the SEEK button to mov

selected track.

Press and hold the FF button to

tracks. Release the FF button

feature.

Press the RND button a secon

Play.

Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for

Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for P

Notes On Playing MP3 FilesThe radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3

file recording media and formats are l imited. When

writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-

tions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

h 3 fil di di d b h d i

• Maximu m nu mber of files: 2

• Maximum number of folders

• Maximum number of charact

• Level 1: 12 (includi ng

3-character extension)




The MP3 file recording m edia sup ported by the rad io are

CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supp orted by th e radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the rad io may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of directory levels: 15



Multisession disc formats are

Multisession discs may contain

CD audio tracks and computer fi

Discs created with an option suc

writing are most likely multis

multisession for CD audio or MPlonger disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3

extension may cause playback p roblems. The rad io is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

Wh i h MP3 d di d

MPEG Specifi-cation

Sampling quency (k

MPEG-1 Au dioLayer 3

48, 44.1,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



When u sing the MP3 encoder to compress audio d ata to

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also sup por ted. The ma jority of MP 3 files

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rates.


24, 22.05,

ID3 Tag information for artist,

are sup ported for version 1 ID3

supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported

supported.



LOA D / EJECT - Eject

Press the LOAD/ EJECT button an d the p ush-


the CD was loaded and the disc will unload

and move to the entrance for easy removal.

Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc

i b i j t d d t th t th di

MSG or INFO Button (CD M

Press and MSG or INFO button

The radio scrolls through the fol

Song Title, Artist, File Name, a

able).

Press the MSG or INFO button

l d ti i it d

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

If you h ave ejected a disc and h ave not removed it within

15 second s, it will be reloaded . If the CD is not rem oved,

the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If

the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,

the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.

If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the


INSERT DISC” for 2 m inutes. After 2 minu tes the radiowill go to the previous tuner mode.

elapsed time priority mode.

Press and hold the MSG or IN

message display priority mode

priority mode will display the s

RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 P

Press the FF side of the button

the MP3 selection.

TUNE Control (CD Mode for

Pressing the TUNE Control a

Tone, Balance, and Fade.

AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Switches back to Radio mode.

RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing this button plays files randomly.

SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press the SET/ DIR Button to display folders when

Operating Instructions - Sate

Equipped)

Refer to the Satellite Radio

Manual.

Operating Instructions - Vide

System (VES) (If Equipped)

Refer to separate Video Enter




Press the SET/ DIR Button to display folders, whenplaying an MP3 discs that have a file/ folder structure.

Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or

move through available folders. Press the TUNE control

to select a folder.

Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/ Load/ Eject.

Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If

Equipped)

Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s

Manual.

Refer to separate Video EnterGuide.

SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIORADIO, HANDS FREE PHONWMA CAPABILITIES

NOTE: The radio sales code is


Power Switch/Volume Contro

Press the ON/ VOL control to

the ON/ VOL a second time to


The electronic volume control

degrees) in either d irection w ith

volume control to the right incr

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACCposition to operate the radio.

volume control to the right incrthe left decreases it.

When the audio system is turn

set at the same volume level as


Press the mode button repeated

CD player, Cassette, Satellite,

System (VES) (if equipped).



station in either AM/ FM or Sat

RAK Radio

Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left

side to seek d own. The radio will remained tuned to the

new station until you make another selection. Holding

the button and will bypass stations without stopping

until you release it.




1. Press and hold the time butt


Audio control.

3. After the hours are adjust

Tun e/ Aud io control to set the m




Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search fort he next s tation, in eit her A M, FM or Satellit e (if

equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite

scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continu -

ing to the n ext. To stop the search, press SCAN a second

time.

Time Button

Press the time bu tton and the time of day w ill display for

5 seconds.

Tun e/ Aud io control to set the mbegin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using th

control.


INFO Button (Radio Mode)

Press the INFO button for an RB

letters displayed). The rad io w

message broadcast (if available)

mode only).

RW/FF (Radio Mode)

Pressing the rewind/ fast forward bu tton causes the tun er

to search for the next frequency in the direction of the

arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-

lite (if equ ipped ) frequencies.

TUNE Control (Radio Mode)

Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease

Press the rotary TUNE control

will display. Turn the TUNE con

increase or decrease the Treble



adjust the soun d level from the r

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decreasethe frequency.






decrease the Bass tones.Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID






ers.


balance, and fade.

RND/PTY Button (Radio Mo

Pressing this button once will t5 second s. If no action is taken

out, the PTY icon will turn off

within 5 seconds will allow the p rogram format type to

be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-

cast PTY information.

Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:

Program Type16 Digit-Character Dis-

play

No program type or un

Cou ntry

Old ies

Soft

N ostalgia

Jazz

Classicalh h d l




No program type or un-defined

None

N ew s N ew s

Inform ation Inform ation

Sports Sp orts

Talk Talk

Rock Rock

Classic Rock Classic_Rock Ad u lt H its Ad u lt_H its

Soft Rock Soft_Rock

Top 40 Top_40

Classical Rh yth m a nd Blu es

So ft Rh yth m a nd Blu es

Foreig n La ng ua ge

Religiou s Mu sic

Religiou s Talk

Personality

Public

College Unassigned

Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is

displayed, the rad io will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY

function only operates w hen in the FM mod e.

If a preset bu tton is activated w hile in the PTY (Program

Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio

will tune to the preset station

Operating Instructions — TaInsert the cassette with the expo

left and the mechanical action

pull the cassette into the play p

NOTE: When subjected to extr

the tape mechanism may requir

up for proper op eration Somet

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



will tune to the preset station.

NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,

simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a

“PTY seek”.

Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)

These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you

commit to pu sh-button m emory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12


up for proper op eration. Sometbe experienced due to a defectiv

demagnetize the tape heads at l

Seek ButtonPress the SEEK button up for t

tape and down to return to the

selection.

Press the SEEK button up or number to skip forward or bac

Press the SEEK button once to m

move 2 selections, etc.

Fast Forward (FF)Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape

in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance

until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is

reached. At the end of the tape, the tape w ill play in the

opp osite direction.

Rewind (RW)

Scan ButtonPress this button to play 10 se

Press the scan bu tton a second t

Changing Tape DirectionIf you wish to change the direc

being played), press Preset 6.

display w indow will show the




Rewind (RW)Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape

direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed

again or un til the end of the tape is reached . At the end of

the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.

Tape EjectPress this button and the cassette will disen-

gage and eject from the radio.

display w indow will show the

Metal Tape SelectionIf a standard metal tape is inse

player will autom atically select

Pinch Roller ReleaseIf ignition power or the radio O

off, the pinch roller will autom

the tape from any d amage. Whetape player, the pinch roller wil

and the tape will resume play.

Noise ReductionThe Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the

tape player is on, but may be switched off.

To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press

Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the

display will go off when the Dolby System is off.

*”Dolby” noise reduction is manufactured under license

compact discs (CD-RW) compa

and mu ltisession compact discs

and WMA.

Inserting Compact Di sc(s)

CAUTIO

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



* Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby

and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-

ratories Licensing Corporation.

Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD AudioPlay)

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC


NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of p laying compact

discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable

CAUTIO

This CD player will accept 4

only. The use of other sized

CD player mechanism.

You may eject a disc with the r

If you insert a disc with the ig

ON, the unit will switch frombegin to play when you insert t

show the disc number, the track

in minutes and seconds. Play w

track 1

SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next

selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to

return to the beginning of the current selection, or return

to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is

within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.

SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Radio display will show LOAD

is loading and “READING D

reading the disc.

LOAD/EJT - Eject

Press the LOAD/ EJT


the CD was loaded a




SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the

CD currently playing.

LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD AudioPlay)

LOAD/EJECT - Load

Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-

button with the corresponding number wherethe CD is being loaded. The radio will display

PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT

DISC. After the radio displays INSERT DISC, insert the

CD into the player.

the CD was loaded aand move to the ent

Radio display will show EJECT

is being ejected and prompt the

Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT

all CDs will be ejected from the

If you h ave ejected a d isc and ha

15 seconds, it will be reloaded . the radio will continue to play

the CD is removed and there are

the radio will play the next CD

If the CD is removed and there


INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio

will go to the previous tuner mode.

The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display

RND/PTY Button (Random P

MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press this button while the C

Random Play. This feature p la

compact d isc in rand om order

change of pace.

NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Press and h old FF (Fast Forward ) and the CD p layer will

begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or

another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button

works in a similar manner.

TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.

AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.

NOonly.

Press the SEEK button to mov

selected track.

Press and hold the FF button to

tracks. Release the FF button

feature. If the RW button is pres

reverse to the beginning of the Press the RND button a secon

Play.

Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)


Notes On Playing MP3 FilesThe radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3

file recording media and formats are l imited. When

writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-

tions.

The radio uses the following lim

• Maximum number of directo

• Maximu m nu mber of files: 2

• Maximum number of folders

• Maximum number of charact




Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3 file recording m edia sup ported by the rad io are

CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supp orted by th e radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other thanISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the rad io may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.





Multisession disc formats are

Multisession discs may contain

CD audio tracks and computer fiDiscs created with an option suc

writing are most likely multis

multisession for CD audio or MP

longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3

extension may cause playback p roblems. The rad io is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

When u sing the MP3 encoder to compress audio d ata to

MPEG Specifi-cation

Sampling quency (k


48, 44.1,

MPEG-2 Au dio

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



g pan MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also sup por ted. The ma jority of MP 3 files

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rates.


24, 22.05,

ID3 Tag information for artist, s

are sup ported for version 1 ID3

supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported

supported.

Playback of MP3 and WMA Files

When a medium containing MP3 d ata is loaded, the

radio checks all fi les on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the rad io will take more

time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may

be affected by the following:

Operation Instructions - (CDWMA Audio Play)

SEEK Button (CD Mode for M

Pressing the right side of the SE

file. Pressing the left side of th

beginning of the file. Pressing t

ten seconds plays the previous




y g

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R m edia

• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

To increase the sp eed of disc loading, it is recomm ended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before

writing to the disc.

p y p

LOAD/EJECT Button (CD MoPlay)

LOAD/EJT - Load

Press the LOAD/ EJT


the CD is being loade

PLEASE WAIT and p

DISC. After the radio displays

CD into the player.

The radio d isplay will show LOADING DISC when the

disc is loading.

LOAD/EJT - Eject

Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-


the CD was loaded and the disc will unload

and move to the entrance for easy removal.R di di l ill h EJECTING DISC h th di

INFO Button (CD Mode for M

Press and INFO bu tton w hile pl

The radio scrolls through the fol

Song Title, Artist, File Name, a

able).

Press the INFO button once m

time priority mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc

is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

If you h ave ejected a disc and h ave not removed it within

15 second s, it will be reloaded . If the CD is not rem oved,

the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If

the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,

the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.

If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in theradio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display

INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio

will go to the previous tuner mode.

Press and hold the INFO butto

display priority mode or elaps

mode will display the song title

RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 a

Press the FF side of the button

the file or MP3 and WMA selec

TUNE Control (CD Mode forPressing the TUNE Control a

Tone, Balance, and Fade.

AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Switches back to Radio mode.

RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing this button plays files randomly.

SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press the SET/ DIR Button to display folders, when

playing an MP3 discs that have a file/ folder structure.

Operating Instructions - Sate

Equipped)

Refer to the “Satellite Radio”

Manual.

Operating Instructions - Vide

System (VES) (If Equipped)

Refer to separate “Video EnteG id ”




p y g

Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or

move through available folders. Press the TUNE control

to select a folder.

Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)


Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If

Equipped)Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s

Manual.

Guide.”

SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIOWITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

menu s and instructions for sele

tions and routes, AM/ FM stere

changer with MP3 capability.

Mapping information for navi

DVD that is loaded into the un

all of North America. Refer to

Manual” for detailed operating

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning

System-based navigation system with an integrated color

screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection

Operating Instructions — SaEquipped)Refer to your “Navigation Use

operating instructions.


Refer to “Setting the Clock” un

your Navigation User’s Manualthe clock.

REC Radio

SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPEDSatellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broad cast-

ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to

coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-

lite Rad io. This service offers over 100 chann els of mu sic,

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-

dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

System Activation

3. Your Vehicle Identification N

Electronic Serial Number/SiNumber (ESN/SID)The Electronic Serial Number/ S

ber is needed to activate you

system. To access the ESN/ SI

steps:




System Activation

NOTE: Your vehicle’s rad io mu st be on and in satellite

mode when the activation process takes place.

To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the

toll-free nu mb er 888-539-7474, or visit th e Sirius w eb site

at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-

tion available when activating your system:

1. The Electronic Serial Nu mber/ Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/ SID).

2. Credit card information.

ESN/SID Access With REF R

With the ignition sw itch in th e A

the radio OFF, press the CD

simultaneously for 3 seconds. T

twelve-digit ESN/ SID num ber

SEEK UP button to d isplay the n

to press the SEEK UP button u

digits display. The SEEK DOWthe first four digits display.

ESN/ SID mode when any other button is pushed, the

ignition is turn ed OFF, or 5 minu tes has p assed since any

button w as pushed.

ESN/SID Access With RAQ and RAK Radios

With th e ignition switch in th e ACCESSORYp osition and

the radio OFF, p ress the CD Eject and TIME buttons

simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/ SID nu m-bers w ill d isplay The rad io will exit th e ESN/ SID mod e

Selecting Satellite Mode in RRadios

Selecting Satellite Mode — R

Press the MODE button repeate

appears in the display.

A CD may remain in th e rad io w

mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



bers w ill d isplay. The rad io will exit th e ESN/ SID mod e

when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned

OFF, or 5 m inutes has passed since any button was

pushed.

ESN/SID Access With REC Navigation Radios

Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.

With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the

radio off, p ress the CD Eject and Set bu ttons simulta-

neously u ntil the 12 digits of the ESN/ SID app ear on the

screen.

Selecting Satellite Mode — R

Press the MODE button repeate

appears in the display.

These radios will also display

and program type. For more in

title and artist press the MSG o

A C D or t ape m ay r em ai n i n

Satellite rad io m ode.

Selecting a ChannelPress and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for

the next channel. Press the top of the button to search u p

and the bottom of the button to search d own. Holding the

TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until

the button is released.

Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) toautomatically change channels every 7 seconds The

Storing and Selecting Pre-SIn ad dition to th e 12 AM and 12

may also commit 12 satellite

mem ory. These satellite channe

erase any AM or FM p re-set me

memory pre-set procedures tha

Using the PTY (Program Typequipped)




automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The

radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before

moving on to the next channel. The word SCAN will

app ear in the d isplay between each chann el change. Press

the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.

NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content

can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-

7474 to d iscuss options for channel blocking or un block-ing. Please have your ESN/ SID information available.

equipped)Follow the PTY button instruc

radio.

PTY Button SCAN

When the desired program typ

SCAN button within five secon

seconds of the selected channel b

channel of the selected programbutton a second time to stop th

NOTE: Pressing the SEEK o

performing a mu sic type scan, w

one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory

button d uring a m usic type scan, will call up the mem ory

channel and stop the search.

PTY Button SEEK

When the desired program is obtained, press the SEEK

button within five seconds. The channel will change to

the next channel that matches the program type selected.

S lli A

Reception QualitySatellite reception may be inter

following reasons.

• The vehicle is parked in a

structure or under a physical

• Dense tree coverage may in

form of short aud io mutes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Satellite AntennaTo ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the

roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects

placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause

decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be

placed as far forward as p ossible. Do n ot p lace items

directly on or above the antenna.

• Driving u nd er wide brid ges o

cause intermittent reception.

• Placing objects over or too

cause signal blockage.

REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IFEQUIPPEDThe remote sound system controls are located on the rear

surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to

access the switches.

The right hand control is a ro

button in the center. Pressing t

increase the volume and pres

switch will decrease the volum e

right hand control will allow yo

The left hand control is a rocker

button in the center. The functiois different d epending on whic




is different d epending on whic

The following describes the left

each mode.

Radio OperationPressing the top of the left side

the next listenable station an d p

switch w ill SEEK dow n for the

The button located in the cente

w i ll t une t o t he next pr e-s et

programmed in the rad io pre-s

Remote Sound System Controls

Tape PlayerPressing the top of the switch once will go to the next

selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the

switch once will go to the beginning of the current

selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it

is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.

If you press the switch up or down twice it plays thesecond selection, three times, it w ill p lay the third, etc.

If you press the switch up or

second track, three times, it wil

The button in the center of the

function in this mode.

CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYTo keep the cassette tapes and p

take the following precautions:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



, , p y ,

The button in the center of the left hand switch has no

function in this mode.

CD PlayerPressing the top of the switch once will go to the next

track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once

will go to the beginning of the current track or to the

beginning of the p revious track if it is within on e second

after the current track begins to play.

1. Do not use cassette tapes lon

sound quality and tape durabili

ished.

2. Keep the cassette tape in

slackness and du st when it is n

3. Keep the cassette tape aw ay fand magnetic fields such as the

4. Before inserting a tape, ma

adhering flatly to the cassette.

5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind

a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape

drive gear and twist the pencil in the requ ired directions.

Maintain your cassette tape p layer. The head and capstan

shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape

deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of

deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wraparound and become lodged in the tape transport. The

COMPACT DISC MAINTENATo keep the compact discs in g

following precautions:

1. H andl e t he di sc by it s ed

surface.

2. If the d isc is stained, clean th e

wiping from center to edge.




g p p

other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from

one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were

turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should

periodically clean the head with a commercially available

WET cleaning cassette.

As p reventive maintenance, clean the h ead about every

30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes verydirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to

remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to

ing the disc.

4. Do not u se solvents such as b

or antistatic sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case afte

6. Do not expose the disc to dir

7. Do not store the disc where t

too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-

lar disc, i t may be damaged, oversized, or have theft

protection encoding. Try a known good disc before

considering disc p layer service.

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONESUnder certain conditions, the operation of a cellular

phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor-mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened

CLIMATE CONTROLSThe controls for the heating and

vehicle consist of a series of rot

controls can be set to obtain des

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened

or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.

This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio

performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-

sitioning of the antenna, it is recomm end ed th at the rad io

volume be turned down or off du ring cellular phone

operation.

Climate Control

Heater Only — Fleet Vehicles The mode co

control panel

following po

NOTE: To improve your selecallows you to operate at interm




allows you to operate at interm

the major modes. These interme

tified by the small dots.

Panel

Outside air flows through

instrument panel.Manual Heating Controls

Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level)

Select the recirculation modes when

t he outs ide air contains s m oke or

odors. This feature allows for recircu-

lation of interior air only. Air flows

through the pan el outlets in this mod e.

Air flows through the panel only or

through both the panel and floor ventsdepending on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level)

Defrost

Outside air is primarily d

through the defroster outl

the windshield, and the demist

edge of each side of the instrum

Blower Control

The r ot ar y kcontrol pane

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



depending on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level).

Bi-Level

Outside air flows through the outlets located in the

instrument panel and at the floor.

Mi x

Outside air flows in equal proportions through the

floor and defroster outlets.

Turn the kno

four position

speed you de

off, turn the

tion.

Temperature Control

The rotary knob at the center of the

control panel controls the temperatu re

of the inter ior air. You can choose y our

degr ee of com fort by r ot at ing t he

knob. The coldest temperature setting

is to the extreme left (blue region) and

the warmest setting is to the extremeright (red region) of the rotation

Air Conditioning and Heatin




right (red region) of the rotation.

Air Conditioning Operation

To turn on the Air Ccontrol at any speed

button located a t the r

Conditioned air will

Air Conditioning A

outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the

snowflake bu tton shows that the air conditioning is on.

Press the button a second time to turn the air condition-

ing off.

Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed

when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a

normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on andoff to m aintain comfort and increase fuel economy.

NOTE: To improve your selec


the major modes. These interme

tified by the small dots.

Recirculation Modes (Panel o

Select the re

the outside aihigh hum idi

d i d hi

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



The mode control (at the right of the

control panel) can be set in any of the

following positions:

desired. This

culation of in

t hrough t he

both the pane

ing on the selected mode (panel

NOTE: Selecting a “Recirculat

necessarily consum e m ore fuel Panel

Outside air flows through

instrument panel.

Bi-Level


instrument panel and at the floor.

Floor

Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-

lets located under the instrument panel.

Mi xOutside air flows in equal proportions through the

Blower Control

The r ot ar y k

control pane

Turn the kno

four position

speed you de

off, turn the

tion.

T t C t l




Outside air flows in equal proportions through the

floor and defroster ou tlets, and the air conditioning

may be on.

Defrost

Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield

through the defroster outlets located at the base of

the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the

edge of each side of the instrument p anel, and the airconditioning may be on.

Temperature Control

The rotary k

control panel

of the interior

degr ee of c

knob. The co

is to the extre

the warmest right (red region) of the rotation

Circulation

The cab is designed with features to promote outside air

circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These

are air exhausters that provide the means for regular

exchange of cab air.

Side w indow dem isters d irect air flow specifically to th e

window glass to help prevent interior fogging of theglass. They are located in the extreme outside upper

d f th i t t l Th d i t l

Air Conditioning with Dual ZControl — If EquippedWith the Dual Zone Temperatu

front seat occupant can indepe

perature of air coming from th

the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-

vide extra air d ucts for circulation. They are in operation

wh enever the Floor, Mix or Defrost m odes are in u se. To

remove frost from the side windows, it is best to use the

full defrost mode.

NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a

hissing sound from un der the hood for a short period of time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air

conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of

a problem with the air conditioning system. Dual Zone Cont

Air Conditioning and Heating Operation

To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any

speed and press the snowflake button located on the

control panel. Conditioned air will be directed through

the outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the

snowflake bu tton shows that the air conditioning is on.

Press the button a second time to turn the air condition-

ing off.

A/C Pushbutton

Recirculation Pushbutton

Pushing the

lows interior

ously in an y

and defrost/ f

d ow n o f t

Cooldown” l

Mode Control




A/C Pushbutton

With the fan control in the ON posi-

tion, pushing the A/ C button turns on

the air conditioning compressor. An

indicator light on the button shows

that the Air Conditioning compressor

is on. Conditioned air is now directed

through the mode outlets selected.Pushing the button a second time turns the compressor

OFF.

Th e m od e

choose from

distribution.

NOTE: To improve your selec


the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-

tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both

modes.

Panel


instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to

direct the airflow.Bi-Level

Mi x

Outside air flows in equal

floor and defroster outlets

Defrost

Outside air is primarily d

through the defroster outl

the windshield and side windo

NOTE: The air conditioning

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-

ment panel and those located on the floor.

NOTE: There is a difference in tem peratu re between th e

upp er and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer

air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives imp roved

comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Heat

Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-

lets located under the instrument panel.

NO g

both Mix and Defrost or a blen

the A/ C button has not been pr

the air to help dry the windshie

Blower Control

The r ot ar y knob on t he l eft of t he

control panel is the blower control.

Turn the knob clockwise to one of the

four positions to obtain the blower

speed you desire. To turn the blower

off, turn the knob to the far left posi-

tion.

Dual Zone Temperature Cont




Use this control to regulate th

inside the passenger compartmeby having separate temperatur

Dual Zone Tempera

the d river and front p assenger. The blue area of the scale

indicates cooler temp eratures w hile the red area indicates

warmer temperatures.

Circulation

The cab is designed with features to promote outside air

circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These

are air exhausters that provide the means for regular

exchange of cab air.

conditioning system has been on

a problem with the air conditio

Operating Tips

Fast Cooldown

For a fast cooldown, turn the b

the extreme right position, turn

panel fresh position, press the on the air conditioning, and d

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



Side w indow dem isters d irect air flow specifically to th e

window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the

glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper

edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-

vide extra air d ucts for circulation. They are in operation

whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use.

NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear ahissing sound from un der the hood for a short period of

time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air

open for the first few minutes. O

expelled, close the windows an

pu sh-button. When a comfort

reached, choose a mode positio

ture control slide and blower

maintain comfort. For h igh h um

be necessary to remain in themaintain comfort.



NOTE: On models equipped with Diesel engines, the

idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at

elevated coolant tem peratu res to improve engine cooling.

Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an

automatic recirculation system. When the system senses

a heavy load or high heat conditions, it m ay u se partial

Recirculation A/ C mode to provide additional comfort.

Winter Operation

When operating the system du

make sure the air intake, locate

windshield, is free of ice, slush

tions.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR



STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

Starting Procedures – Gas Engines . . . . . . . . . . .245

▫ Manu al Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

Manu al Transmission . . . . .

▫ Manual Transmission — 6



▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .249

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

▫ Autom atic Transmission With Overdrive . . . . .250

▫ Recommended Vehicle Shi

▫ Downsh ifting – All Manu a

Four-Wheel- Drive Operation

▫ Manually Shifted Transfer

Information/ Precautions .

▫ Shifting Procedure - Manua

Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Transfer Case Reminder Li

Limited-Slip Differential — If Equipped . . . . . . .262

Driving On Slipp ery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

Axle Locker System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264

Stabilizer/ Sway Bar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

Power Wagon – Safe Off-Road Driving . . . . . . .268

▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle

Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

▫ After Driving Off-Road . .

Winch Usage – If Equipped

▫ Things To Know Before Us

▫ Und erstanding The Featur

▫ Winch Accessories . . . . . .

▫ Op erating You r Winch . . .

▫ Rigging Techniques

242 STARTING AND OPERATING



▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .273

▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High

Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278

▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281

▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . 283

▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

▫ Rigging Techniques . . . . .

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . .

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Brake Noise . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Four-Wheel A nti-Lock Brak

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .

Power Steering . . . . . . . . .

Multi Displacement System (MDS) - 5.7L Engine

Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . .317

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .318

Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . .

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . .

▫ Alignm ent And Balance . .

Sup plemental Tire Pressure I

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . .

START



▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323

▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326

▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .327

▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .328

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire Rotation Recommendati

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . .

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . .

▫ Gasoline/ Oxygenate Blend

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . .

▫ Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

▫ Adding Fuel (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339

Vehicle Loading 341

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weigh

▫ Towing Requirements . . .

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors —

Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Dodge Power Wagon Mod

Recreational Towing 4 Wh




Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350

Recreational Towing — 4–Wh

(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . .

▫ Recreational Towing Proce

Shift Transfer Case — If E

▫ Returning To Normal Oper

Shift Transfer Case . . . . .

Equipment Identification Pla

STARTING PROCEDURES – GAS ENGINESThe starter should not be operated for more than 15-

second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such

intervals will protect the starter from overheating.

WARNING!

Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest orsleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inad-

vertently moving the gear selection lever or by

WARNIN

Do not leave children or a

vehicles in hot weather. Inter

cause serious injury or death

Manual TransmissionApp ly the p arking brake, p lace t

in NEUTRAL and depress the

START



vertently moving the gear selection lever or by

pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause exces-

sive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in over-

heating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or

fatal injuries.

before starting th e vehicle. This

a clutch interlocking ignition

unless the clutch is fully depres

Automatic TransmissionStart the engine with the select

PARK position. Apply the brak

driving range.

Normal StartingN orm al s tar ting of eit her a w ar m or cold engine is

obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator

pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release

when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within

10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5

seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.

NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission

shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be




depressed to shift out of Park (P).

Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transmission Only

Do not press th e accelerator. Tur n th e ignition key briefly

to START p osition, and release it. The starter motor will

continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself

when the engine is running.

If Engine Fails To StartIf the engine fails to start afte

normal starting procedure, it m

accelerator ped al all the w ay to t

while cranking the engine. This

fuel in case the engine is floode

Ignition Key P

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the

engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to

15 seconds before trying again.

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the

WARNIN

Do not attempt to push or tow

started. Vehicles equipped w

mission cannot be started th

could enter the catalytic co

engine has started, ignite and

and vehicle. If the vehicle habooster cables may be used t

booster battery or the battery i

START



Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the

throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start

the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing

serious personal injury.

booster battery or the battery i

type of start can be dangero

See section 6 of this manua

starting procedures and fo llo

If the engine has been flooded, i

have enough p ower to continue

released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-

erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the

accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running

smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15

second periods of cranking with the accelerator ped al

held to the floor, the normal starting procedu re should be

repeated.

After Starting

WARNIN

Be sure to turn off the engin

sleep in your car. Accidents c

vertently moving the gear

pressing the accelerator pedal

sive heat in the exhaust syst

heating and vehicle fire whicfatal injuries.




te Sta t gThe idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-

crease as the engine warms up. WARNIN

Do not leave children or a

vehicles in hot weather. Inter

cause serious injury or death

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPEDThe engine block heater warms engine coolant and

permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord

to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a

grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater cord is routed u nd er the hood on

the d river side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that

is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power

Module.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTIO

Damage to the transmission m

ing precautions are not obser

• Shift into PARK only after

a complete stop.

• Shift into or out of REV

START



WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.

Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could

cause electrocution.

vehicle has come to a c

engine is at idle speed.

• D o n ot sh ift f rom REVERS

into any forward gear wh

idle speed.

•

Before shifting into any geis firmly on the brake ped

WARNING!

It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or

“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear whenthe engine is idling normally and when your right

foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

desired d rive position. Pull the

when shifting into Reverse, S

when shifting out of Park.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine whe

Neutral position into another g

“P” ParkThis gear position supplemen

locking the transmission. The




y p

Automatic Transmission with OverdriveThe gear shift selector d isplay, located in th e instrum ent

panel cluster, indicates the transmission gear range (the

selector is illum inated for night driving). The selector

lever is moun ted on the right side of the steering colum n.You must depress the brake ped al, to pull the selector

lever ou t of p ark (P) position (Brake In terlock System). To

drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neu tral to the

g

this range. Never u se Park w hil

App ly the parking brake w hen l

range. Always apply parking b

selector in Park position. On 4

sure that the transfer case is in

WARNING!

Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-

sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always

apply parking brake fully when parked to guard

against vehicle movement and possible injury or

damage.

WARNING!

WARNIN

It is dangerous to shift the sel

“N” if the engine speed is hig

your foot is not firmly on

vehicle could accelerate qui

verse. You could lose contro

someone or something. Onlythe engine is idling normally

foot is firmly on the brake pe

START



WARNING!

Your vehicle could m ove and in jure you and others if

it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to

move the gearshift lever back and forth w ithout first

pulling it toward you after you have set it in P. Make

sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.

y p

“R” Reverse

U se t his r ange only aft er t he

complete stop.

“N” Neutral

Shift to Neutral when the vehicle is standing for pro-

longed periods with the engine running. The engine may

be started in this range. Set the p arking brake if you m ust

leave the vehicle.

NOTE: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving, with

the transm ission in n eutral (N) position, can cause severe

damage to the transmission.

“D” Drive

is desirable. Use it also when c

for engine braking when desce

grades.

NOTE: Do not exceed maximu

“1” First

Use this position for driving up

engine braking at low speed s (2when going downhill.





This position provides all forward gears, including 3rd

gear direct and 4th and 5th (if equipped) gear overdrive

(see Overdrive Operation). Use this range for most city

and highway driving.

“2” Second

Use this position for driving slowly in heavy city trafficor on mountain roads where m ore precise speed control


Overdrive Operation

The overdrive automatic transm

tronically controlled fourth and

(Overdrive). The transmission

from Drive to Overdrive if the

present:

• the transmission selector is i

• the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-

perature;

• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48

km/ h);

• the “TOW HAUL O/ D OFF” switch has not been

activated;

• transmission has reached normal op erating temp era-ture.

If the transmission temperatur

transmission will autom atically

gear for op eration at this temp er

temperatu re becomes hot enou g

may illuminate and the transmi

of Overdrive until the transmi

cooldown, the transmission wi

tion.The transmission will down shift

if the accelerator pedal is ful

START



NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-

peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive

and will automatically select the m ost d esirable gear for

operation at this temperature. N ormal operation will

resume when the transmission fluid temperature has

risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under

torque converter clutch, later in this section.

if the accelerator pedal is ful

speeds above approximately 35

When To Use “TOW HAUL” and “O/D OFF”

Modes

reduce the potential for trans

failure due to excessive shift

“TOW HAUL” mode, 5th gear

and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns

Overdrive (4th gear) are allow

(for improved fuel economy)

throttle downshifts to 3rd gear

proved braking) when d riving cing the “TOW HAUL O/ D OFF

select O/ D OFF will disable 4th




When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a

heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-

curs, press the “TOW HAUL O/ D OFF” button once to

select TOW HAUL. This will improve performance and

which should eliminate any exc

ing.

The “TOW HA UL” or “O/ D OF

the instrument cluster to indic

been activated. Pressing the sw

normal operation. If the “TOWmodes are desired, the button m

the engine is started.

Tow Haul O/D Off Switch

Torque Conve rter Clu tch

A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been

included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.

A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-

cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly

different feeling or response during normal operation in

the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during

acceleration w hen the tran smission dow nshifts to secondgear, the clutch autom atically disengages.

NOTE: The torque converter clutch will n ot engage

NOTE: If the vehicle has no

days, the first few seconds of op

transmission into gear may seem

the fluid partially d raining from

the transmission. This conditio

cause damage to the transmissi

will refill within five seconds o

any other gear position.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

START



NOTE: The torque converter clutch will n ot engage

un til the transmission fluid and engine coolant are w arm

[usua lly after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of d riving]. Because

the engine speed is higher when the torque converter

clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission

is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.

Pressing the “TOW HAUL O/ D OFF” button, when thetransmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that

the transm ission is able to shift into and out of overdr ive.

WARNIN

You or others could be inj

vehicle unattended without

brake fully applied. The par

ways b e ap pl ied wh en th evehicle, especially on an incl

Truck models with manual transmission are equipped

with a clutch interlocking ignition system. The clutch

pedal must be fully depressed to start the vehicle.

Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As

you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-

tor pedal.

To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depressthe clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to

stop. Move the shift lever from the Neutral position

t i ht d b k i t R

Manual Transmission — 6 STh e P ow er Wa go n m a y b e e

manual transmission. This tran

1st gear which should be used

position when carrying a p ayl

Damage to the clutch can resul

3rd gear w ith a loaded vehicle. A

be launched in 2nd gear. Useorder – do not skip a gear.

For most city driving you may




straight across and back into Reverse.

Never d rive with your foot resting on the clutch p edal, or

attempt to h old the vehicle on a h ill with the clutch pedal

partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on

the clutch.

y g y y

1st through 5th gear ranges. Fo

with light accelerations, 6th g

shift into 5th gear, move the

beyond the spring pressure po

When shifting from 5th to 4th g

toward you in one m otion. Do nleft as you may shift acciden

damage the transmission.

To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress

the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to

stop. Reverse has a “crash-through” lockout feature.

Move the shift lever from the Neutral position straight

across, in one swift motion, and down into Reverse.

Recommended Vehicle Shift SpeedsTo utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both

fuel economy and performance, it should be up shifted aslisted in recommend ed shift speed chart. Shift at the

vehicle sp eeds listed for acceleration. Earlier u pshifts

Downshifting – All Manual TM ov in g fr om a h ig h g ea r d o

recommended to preserve bra

steep hills. In addition, downs

provides better acceleration wh

speed. For acceleration at spee

km/ h), 2nd gear is recommend

CAUTIO

START



p p

during cruise conditions (steady speeds) will result in

increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.

6 Speed Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in mph(km//h)

En-

gine

A xle M od e 1 t o 22 to

3

3 to 44 to

5

5 to 6

5.7L ALLAccel

&Cruise

15(24)

25(40)

40(65)

45(72)

50(81)

When descending a hill, be ve

one gear at a time to prev

engine which can cause valv

To p revent clutch an d transmiss

should be downshifted at speelisted in the Maximum Reco

Speed chart.

Maximum Recommended Dow nshifting Speeds

GearSelec-tion

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th

Maxi-m umSpeed

16 mph(25

km/ h)

30 mph(48

km/ h)

50 mph(80

km/ h)

76 mph(122

km/ h)

105m p h(168

km/ h)

CAUTION!

FOUR-WHEEL- DRIVE OPER

Manually Shifted Transfer CInformation/PrecautionsThe transfer case provides 4 m

wheel-drive high range, 4-whe

tral, and 4-wheel-drive low ran

This transfer case is intended to

drive p osition (2H) for normal

diti h d h d f




CAUTION!

Failure to follow the recommended downshifting

speeds may cause the engine to over speed and / or

damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is

depressed.

ditions such as d ry hard surfac

When add itional traction is requ

and 4L positions can be used t

driveshafts together and force t

to rotate at the same speed. T

simply moving the shift lever The 4H an d 4L positions are int

road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on

dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear

and damage to the d riveline components.

The 4-wh eel drive h igh (4LOCK) and 4–wh eel drive low

(4LOW) lights, located in the instrument cluster, alert the

driver that the vehicle is either in 4-wheel drive high or

4–wh eel drive low and that the front and rear d riveshafts

are locked together. There are no lights for the 2H or N(Neutral) positions.

When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is

NOTE: Do not attempt to mak

front or rear wh eels are sp innin

equipp ed w ith a synchronizer an

rear driveshaft speeds must be e

place. Shifting while only the

spinning can cause damage to t

Because 4-wh eel drive p rovides

is a tendency to exceed safe turnDo not go faster than road cond

NOTE: Delayed shifts ou t of

START



When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is

app roximately three times that of the 2H or 4H p ositions

at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the

engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/ h).

Proper operation of 4-wheel-drive vehicles depends on

tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can

cause damage to the transfer case.

NOTE: Delayed shifts ou t of

experienced due to uneven tire

pressures, excessive vehicle lo

tures.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the

vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the

parking b rake. The transfe r case Ne utral (N) positio n

disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from

the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to moveregardless of the transmission position. The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver is

not in the vehicle

4H

4-Wheel-Drive High Range - L

driveshafts together. Forces the

rotate at the same speed. Addit

slipp ery road surfaces only.

N

Neutral - Disengages both the f

from the p owertrain. To be u seanother vehicle. See Recreationa

mation.




not in the vehicle.

For add itional information on the ap prop riate use of each

transfer case mode position see the information below:

2H

Rear Wheel D rive H i gh Range - N or m al s tr eet andhighway d riving. Dry hard surfaced roads.

4L

4-Wheel-Drive Low Range - L

Locks the front and rear drivesh

fr ont and r ear w heels t o r ot

Additional traction and maxim

loose, slippery road surfaces onl(40 km / h).

Shifting Procedure - Manually Shifted TransferCase

vehicle in motion, the transfer

gage faster if you momentaril

pedal after completing the shift

when shifting the transfer case

2H or 4H ⇔ 4L

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3

an automatic transmission to N

clutch on a manual transmissicoasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 k

case lever firmly to th e d esired p

START



2H ⇔ 4H

Shift ing bet w een 2H and 4H can be m ade w it h t hevehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,

shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/ h). With the

transfer case N (Neutral).

NOTE: Pausing in transfer cas

equipped with an automatic tr

s hutt ing t he engine O FF t o

completing the shift. If d ifficult

transmission to N (Neutral), holengine OFF. Make shift to the d

Manual Transfer Case Shifter

NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the

vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may oc-

cur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly

aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch

teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The pre-

ferred m ethod is with the veh icle rolling 2 to 3 m ph (3 to

5 km/ h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L

with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5

km/ h).

NOTE: Do not attempt to shift to or from 4L while the

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAThe limited-slip differential pro

on snow, ice, mud, sand and g

there is a difference between th

of the surface und er the right an

normal driving and cornering,

forms similarly to a convention

pery surfaces, however, the diff

the driving effort to the rear

traction.




transmission is in gear or clutch is engaged.

Transfer Case Reminder LightThe four-wh eel-dr ive oper ating light (4LOCK), located in

the instrument cluster, is used to alert the driver that the

fr ont axle is fully engaged and all four w heels are

driving.

The limited-slip differential is

slippery driving conditions. Wi

slippery surface, a slight appli

will supply maximum traction.

one rear wheel on an excessivel

momentary application of thenecessary to gain maximum tra

WARNING!

On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-

tial, never run the engine with one rear whe el off the

ground, since the vehi cle may drive through the rear

wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose

control of the vehicle.

Care should be taken to avoid su dd en accelerations when

both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could

b h h l i d ll h hi l

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURWhen driving on wet or slushy

wedge of water to build up be

surface. This is known as hydr

partial or complete loss of vehi

ability. To reduce this possibili

tions should be observed:

1. Slow dow n dur ing r ainst orslushy.

2. Slow down if road has stand

START



cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to

slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a

turn.

2. Slow down if road has stand

3. Replace tires when tread wea

visible.

4. Keep tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain sufficient distance b

the car in front to avoid a colli

Axle Locker SystemDodge Power Wagons are equipped with electronically

locking front and rear axles. Locking the axles provides

greater traction in severe low traction conditions or in

rock climbing environments w here one wh eel is likely to

not be in contact w ith the ground.

CAUTION!

Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced

roads The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and

CAUTIO

Do not try to lock the rear axl

and the tires are spinning.

etrain components. Lock th

tempting situations or nav

could possibly cause the veh

The locking axles are controlled

located on the center console.




roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and

damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles

are locked on hard surfaced roads.

rear axles are unlocked. In the R

rear axle is locked. In the FRO

front and rear axles are locked.

NOTE: Even w hen the axles ar

position, the limited slip differe

provides torque biasing capab

traction environments.

During the command to lock the

will flash un til the axle is locked

has been successfully executed

START



The switch has three positions, AXLE UNLOCK, REAR

LOCK, and FRONT/ REAR. Under normal driving con-

ditions the switch should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK

position. In the AXLE UNLOCK position, the front and

y

solid.

To lock t he r ear axle, pl ace

following the procedure in Four

located in this section of the

locker switch position to REAR

less than 3 MPH (5 KM/H). Th

remain on when the rear axle is

Rotary Locking Axle Switch

NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be

necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator

light is flashing after p lacing the switch in the REAR

LOCK or FRONT/ REAR position, d rive the vehicle in a

turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action.

WARNING!

Do not use the locked axle position for normal

driving. A locked front axle is intended for off-road

driving only. Locking the front axle during on-road

NOTE: The rear axle must be

axle will lock.

To unlock the front axle move

REAR LOCK. The FRONT/ REA

out when the axle is un locked.

NOTE: The axle lockers could

side to side loads on the axl

turn ing the steering wh eel from

hand turn or driving in reverse

be required to release the torq




g y g g

driving will reduce the steering ability. This could

cause an accident and you may be seriously injured.

To lock the front axle move the axle locker switch to

FRONT/ REAR wh ile traveling l ess th an 3 M PH (5

KM/H). The indicator light will be solid when the front

axle is locked.

q q

axles.

To unlock the rear axle move t

AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LO

out when the rear axle is un loc

Stabilizer/Sway Bar SystemPower Wagon vehicles are equipped with an electronic

disconnecting stabilizer/ sway bar. This system allows

greater front susp ension travel in off-road situations.

This system is controlled by the electronic control sway

bar switch located on the instrument panel.

The switch has two positions, o

system is normally in on-road m

green light. The stabilizer/ swa

on-road mode du ring normal d

WARNIN

Do not disconnect the stabil

hard s urfaced roads o r at spee

may lose control of the vehicl

serious injury. The front st

START



j y

vehicle stability and is nece

control of the vehicle. The sy

speed and will attempt to reco

at speeds over 18 MPH. T

flashing off road light and so

vehicle speed is reduced belowill once again attempt to re

Electronic Control Sway Bar Switch

To disconnect the stabilizer/ sway bar, shift to either 4HI

or 4LO as shown in Four Wheel Drive Operation and

press the top of the stabilizer/ sway bar button to obtain

the off-road position. The amber indicator light will flash

un til the stabilizer/ sw ay bar has been fully d isconnected.

NOTE: The stabilizer/ sway bar may be torque locked

due to left and right suspension height differences. This

condition is du e to driving surface d ifferences or vehiclelo ad in g. In o rd e r fo r t he st ab iliz er / s w ay b ar t o

disconnect/ reconnect, the right and left h alves of the bar

must be aligned This alignment may require that the

WARNIN

If stabilizer/sway bar will

mode, vehicle stability is gr

attempt to drive vehicle ov

Driving faster than 18 mph (2

of control of the vehicle, w

serious injury. Contact your

assistance.

POWER WAGON SAFE OF




must be aligned. This alignment may require that the

vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side

to side.

To r et urn t o on-r oad m ode pr es s t he bot tom of t he

stabilizer/ sway bar button.

POWER WAGON – SAFE OF

Off-Road Driving Tips and VThe Power Wagon has excellent

ties. These off-road capabilities

those w ilderness trails where

source of exciting and satisfyinventure out you should contact

agency to determine what are

vehicle (ORV) trails or recreation areas. You should

always tread lightly and only use established roads, trails

or ORV recreational areas. The National Forest Service,

Bureau of Land Management or local Department of

Natural Resources are a wealth of information and usu-

ally have m aps w ith marked trails.

Ramp Travel Index (RTI)

The ramp travel index is the d istance, in inches, that youcan drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree

ramp without lifting an y other w heel off the ground . This

distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the

High Mobility Characteristic

The Power Wagon has high off-

istics with an approach angle A=

angle B= 25.5 d egrees, a runni

14.5 inches, a departure angle D

ground clearance E= 8.4 inches

has a ramp travel index (with t

mod e) of 655. Also the Pow er W

of a 60% (31 degree) slope.

START



distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the

vehicle and multiplied by 1000 is the RTI. The Power

Wagon has an RTI of 655, which means you can articulate

one front w heel 32 inches in the air w hile the other three

wheels remain in contact w ith the ground .




Angles A, B, C, and D

Water Ford

START



Water Fording Characteristics

Water fording characteristic is

cross a body of stil l water, wh

drivetrain are safe from wate

Wagon has high water fording

ability to cross a pool of wate

inches deep at a m aximu m spee

F t d R (Sh ) Diff ti l H i ht E

water 30 inches deep at a m aximu m sp eed of 5 mp h, both

with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.

CAUTION!

The door sill height is 25 inches. Water may intrude

into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths.

Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation

Many off-road driving conditions require the simu lta-

neous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving)

The Basics Of Off-Road Driv

You will encounter many type

road. You should be familiar w

before proceeding. There are

conditions: hard packed dirt, gr

mud, snow and ice. Every surfac

your vehicle’s steering, handlin

ling your vehicle is one of the ke

driving, so always keep a firm g

and maintain a good driving

accelerations, turns or braking. I

d i t d d li it




neous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving).

When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,

using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the

vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also

used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a

steep incline.

road signs, posted speed limits o

you will need to use your own g

safe and wh at isn’t. When on a tr

looking ahead for surface ob

terrain. The key is to plan you r f

remembering what you are curr

CAUTION!

Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other

combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle

exhaust system could cause a fire.

WARNING!

Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down

cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an

down hills, with improved cont

use 4L (Low range) in rain, ice

heavy loads rolling, improve t

(High range) traction will not d

Driving in Snow, Mud and SThere is a drastic reduction in

snow, mud or sand . The vehicle

steering, acceleration and brakishould accelerate slowly, leave g

and avoid abrup t vehicle maneu

slow constant steady pace. Th

START



off-road situation.

When To Use Low Range

When driving off-road, shift into 4L (Low range) for

add itional traction or to improve han dling and control on

slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low

range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power

range This will allow you to idle over obstacles and

y p

vehicle’s mom entum .

• Snow – In heavy snow or fo

traction at slower speeds, sh

low gear and shift the tran

necessary. Don’t shift to a lowmaintain headway. Over-rev

the wheels and traction will b

to a stop, try turning you r steering w heel no more than

a 1 ⁄ 4 turn quickly back and forth, while still applying

throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite

and help maintain your momentum.

CAUTION!

On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at highengine rpm’s or vehicle spee ds because engine brak-

ing may cause skidding and loss of control.

norm ally full of d ebris from

stuck. As a good practice b

hole, get out an d determine h

any hidden obstacles and if t

recovered if stuck.

• Sand – Soft sand is very di

with full tire pressure. When

in a trail maintain your vehinot stop. The key to d riving

appropriate tire pressure, ac

ing abrupt maneuvers and m




• Mu d – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction

around the tires and is very difficult to get through.

You should use 4L (low range) with a gear low enough

to maintain your momentum without shifting. If you

start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheelno m or e t han a 1 ⁄ 4 turn quickly back an d forth for

additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased

threat of vehicle dam age and getting stuck They are

g p

mom entum . If you are going

sandy areas or dunes, reduc

minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa)

surface area. Redu ced tire

improve your traction and ha

the soft sand, but you m ust r

air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard

surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back

up prior to reducing the pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and

total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tireunseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce

your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers.

Keeping a firm grip on the st

vehicle to a complete stop an

forward un til it m akes contact w

throttle lightly while holding a

ease the vehicle up and over th

WARNIN

Crossing obstacles can cause

loading which could cause y

your vehicle.

START



Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other HighPoints)While driving off road, you w ill encounter m any typ es of

terrain. These varying types of terrain bring differenttypes of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path

ahead to determine the correct app roach and your ability

to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong

Using A Spotter

There are many times where it i

or determine the correct path.

path can be extremely difficult w

many obstacles. In these cases

over, through, or around the ob

stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see

the obstacle, w atch your tires and und ercarriage, and

guide you through.

Crossing Large Rocks

When approaching large rocks, choose a path which

ensures you drive over the largest of them with your

tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle.

The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the sidewall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look

ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks w ith

your tires.

CAUTIO

Never attempt to drive over

enough to contact the door si

Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Di

When crossing a ravine, gully,

rut, the angled ap proach is thevehicle’s mobility. Approach t

degree angle and let each tire

independently. You need to us




CAUTION!

Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough

to strike your axles or undercarriage.

p y

large obstacles with steep sides

any large obstacle with steep

enough to p ut the vehicle at risk

caught in a rut, dig a small tren

45-degree angle ahead of the fro

dirt to fill the rut ahead of the

You should now be able to d rive

you just created at a 45-degree

WARNING!

There is an increased risk of roll over whe n crossing

an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.

Crossing Logs

To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approxi-

mately 10 to 15 d egrees). This allows one front tire to beon top of the log while the other just starts to climb the

log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and

accelerator to avoid spinning th e log out from u nd er your

CAUTIO

Do not attempted to cross

diameter than the running gr

vehicle w ill become high cen

Getting High Centered

If you get hung up or high centeof the vehicle and try to determ

hung up on, where it is contac

wh at is the best direction to reco

START



tires. Then ease the v ehicle off the log using your brakes. ing on what you are in contact

and place a few rocks under the

of the high p oint wh en you let t

also try rocking the vehicle or

the object.

CAUTION!

Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects

increases the risk of underbody damage.

Hill ClimbingHill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-

standing of your abilities an d your vehicle’s limitations.Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep

to climb and should not be attemp ted. You shou ld always

feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You

or other obstacles on the path

the vehicle if something go

looks good and you feel conf

mission into a lower gear, shif

(Low) and proceed w ith caut

gear and 4L (Low) for very s

• Driving Up Hill – Once yo

ability to proceed and have sate gear, l ine your vehicle

possible ru n. Accelerate w ith

and apply more pow er as yo

f d i




should always climb hills straight up and down. Never

attempt to climb a hill on an angle.

• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a

hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is

too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hillside trail. Is the trail straight up and dow n? What is on

top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches

race forward into a steep gra

grade could cause you to los

begins to bou nce, ease off the

all four tires back on the grou

crest of the hill ease off the th

over the top. If the w heels stathe crest of a hill, ease off the

headway by turning the stee

a 1 ⁄ 4 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a

fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide

enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not

make it to the top, place the vehicle in reverse and

back straight down the grade using engine resistance

along with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!

Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn

around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline

increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in

distance at the base of the hi

vehicle descends to fast? If y

ability to proceed then make

with the transmission in 1st g

gear on automatic transmis

caution. Allow engine brakin

and apply your brakes if nec

the tires to lock.

WARNIN

Do not descend a steep grade

START



increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in

severe injury.

• Driving Down Hill – Before dr iving dow n a steep h ill

you need to d etermine if i t is too steep for a safe

descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade toosteep to m aintain a slow controlled d escent? Are there

obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of

Do not descend a steep grade

brakes in conjunction with

scending a grade too fast co

control and be seriously inju

• Driving Across An Inclinedriving across an incline. If i

vehicle’s abilities. Driving

more w eight on the d own hill wh eels, which increases

the possibilities of a down hill slide or roll over. Make

sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable

soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle

heading slightly up or down.

WARNING!

Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in severe injury.

If Y St ll O B i T L H d If t ll

help regulate your speed. If t

control vehicle speed, apply

locking or skidding the tires

WARNIN

If the engine stalls or you lo

make it to the top of a stee

attempt to turn around. Totipping and rolling the vehicl

severe injury. Always back ca

hill i n R (Reverse) gear. Nev e




• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall

or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,

allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately

apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift to R

(Reverse). Back slowly down the hill allowing the

compression braking of the engine an d transmission to

hill i n R (Reverse) gear. Nev e

(Neutral) or with the clutch

only the vehicle brakes. N

across a hill, always drive str

Driving Through WaterExtreme care should be taken crossing any type of w ater.

Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be

attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible m anner.

You should only drive through areas w hich are d esig-

nated an d app roved. You shou ld tread lightly and avoid

damage to the environment. You should know your

vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if something

goes wrong. You should never stop or shu t a vehicle off when crossing d eep water u nless you ingested water into

the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not attempt to

restart it. Determine if it has ingested water first. The key

CAUTIO

Water ingestion into the axles

case, engine or vehicle interio

too fast or throug h too dee p of

permanent damage to engi

vehicle components and you

effective once w et and/or mu

• Before You Cross Any Typ

approach any type of water

i f l d

START



g y

to any crossing is low and slow. You w ant to u se 1st gear

in 4L (low) and proceed very slowly with a constant slow

speed (3-5 mph maximum) and light throttle. Keep the

vehicle moving; d o not try to accelerate through the

crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottomof the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the

vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.

you can cross it safely and res

out and walk through the w

stick. You n eed to be su re of i

current and bottom condition

muddy waters, check for hid

you will not be intruding on

recover the vehicle if neces

crossing is the water depth, current and bottom con-

ditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,

effectively increasing th e w ater level on the v ehicle. Be

sure to consider this when d etermining the depth and

the ability to safely cross.

• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other

Standing Water – Pud dles, pools, flooded or other

s tanding w ater areas norm ally contain m ur ky ormuddy waters. These water types normally contain

hidd en obstacles and make it d ifficult to determine an

accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom

condition Murky or muddy water holes are where

CAUTIO

Muddy waters can reduce th

tiveness by depositing debris

• Crossing Ditches, Streams, S

Flow ing Water – Flowing

dangerous. Never attempt stream or river even in sha

w ater can eas ily pus h yo

sweeping it out of control. Ev

hi h t till h




condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where

you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This

makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.

If you are able to d etermine you can safely cross, than

proceed using the low and slow method.

a high current can still wash

your tires putting you and y

There is still a high risk of pe

damage with slower water c

than the vehicle’s running

should never attempt to cros

deeper than the vehicle’s ru

Even the slowest current can

dow nstream out of control if the water is deep en ough

to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.

Before you proceed d etermine the speed of the current,

the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition

and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle

heading slightly upstream using the low and slow

technique.

WARNING!

Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can

push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of

Airing Down For Off-Road DRunning lower tire pressure of

ride comfort and vehicle tracti

pressure allows the tire to bulg

surface area for better flotation

form to the ground contour. Dif

vehicles require different tire pr

rock and heavier vehicles requi

softer surfaces such as sand and need to experiment to determin

situation. It is easier and faster

replace it so, start high an d low

START



p y p g

control. This could put you and your passengers at

risk of injury or drowning.

ber you must return the tires

before driving on road or at h ig

you h ave a way to return the tir

air pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam-

age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of

air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating,

while at a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower

speeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Vehicle RecoveryIf you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation

where you will need to recover you r vehicle. Vehicle

recovery should always be given consideration before

vehicle? Is there an anchor poi

alone or do you have another v

high risk of vehicle d amage du r

Answering these qu estions will

best method of recovery. If you

slightly and the only issue is

cycling you r vehicle wou ld be th

amp le room, an add itional vehic

vehicle impingement on the sutow strap to the vehicle tow h

easy. If the vehicle is severely

where great care needs to be ta




recovery should always be given consideration before

attempting a qu estionable obstacle. You should never go

off-road driving without the ability to recover your

vehicle from a situation. H aving another vehicle with

you usually works best for most situations. The first

thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?

Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go

forw ard or t o go backw ard? C an you s till m ove t he

then n othing can d o the job bette

severely hung up on somethi

vehicle up and stack somethi

allow the vehicle to roll off th

further damage. This should beany recovery method.

CAUTION!

Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first

clearing the object, may result in additional under-

body damage.

• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your ve-

hicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most comm onlyused methods. This simply involves shifting your

vehicle from drive to reverse, while applying throttle

after each shift. During this p rocess, for add itional

traction try turning your steering wheel quickly back

a few rock cycles your vehicl

another method of recovery.

will only cause unnecessary

and the environment.

CAUTIO

Damage can occur when spi

excessive high speed. Do not

than an indicated 35 mph

U i Th T H k Wi

START



traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly back

and forth no more than a 1 ⁄ 4 turn. If you are stuck in

mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during this

process to clean the d ebris from the tread and improve

the traction. You wan t to create a rocking m otion with

the vehicle. This helps build vehicle momentum,which hopefully gets you out. Remember to ease off

and on th e accelerator before and after the shift If after

• Using The Tow Hooks Wi

s tr aps are a quick and eas

vehicle from minor situation

vehicle which is not stuck.

vehicle are designed to take

ated d uring vehicle recovery

or any other vehicle comp

point Using tow straps requi

the two drivers. Good commu nication and line of sight

are required for a safe recovery. First connect the tow

strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles.

There should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the

vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join

two tow straps together using a 1 1 ⁄ 2 inch hard wood

dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming knot-

ted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap

breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup , leaving 2 to3 feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle,

using light throttle, should accelerate tightening th e

strap providing the pulling force needed to free the

hi l h hi l b i d h ld i i

throttle without using th e bra

other driver. This sequence

having the recovered vehicle

WARNIN

Never use tow straps with e

straps with a clevis pin. The

could become projectiles if could cause severe injury. Ne v

3 feet of slack in the strap.

greatly increases the risk of in




vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should assist in

t he r ecovery, at t he t im e of t he s nap, by s low ly

spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling

vehicle. After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of

the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free

and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles.

The driver of the p ulling vehicle should let off the

age. Always keep everyone at

a strapping or winching situa

• Winching (see the section on

additional information on th– Winching is most common

situations: there is no support

controlled force is required to recover the vehicle,

there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle dam-

age, or wh ere nothing else seemed to w ork. A winch

can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of

control. It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the

situation in a slow controlled manor. This control

works w ell for avoiding further vehicle dam age. Once

you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good

anchor point. It needs to be strong enough to holdmore than the vehicle’s weight an d provide a direction

of pull as straight as possible. Use block and tackle if

necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the

i h’ lli f If h h i i

left on the drum, and place a

else over th e strun g ou t cable

t he s t rung out cable helps

ground if it breaks. Next, pla

and app ly a very light throttl

in. Be careful not to allow s

recover the vehicle. Do not t

the drum. If it starts to bunch

can re-spool the cable afterwcable as a tow strap and a

winching.

START



winch’s pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree use

a strap around its base and hook the cable to the strap.

If it is another vehicle, then place that vehicle in park

and block the front tires. If you cannot find an anchor

point w ithin reach try using your sp are tire by burying

it. Once you have d etermined an an chor point hook up

the cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable

WARNING!

Winch cables are under high tension when in use

and can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand

over or straddle the winch cable. N ever jerk or

overload the w inch cable. Ne ver stand in front of the

vehicle while winching. Failure to follow these in-

structions can result in serious or fatal injury.

After Driving Off-RoadOff-road operation p uts m ore stress on your vehicle than

does most on-road driving. After driving off-road, it is

• Check threaded fasteners for

the chassis, drivetrain compo

pension. Retighten them, if re

values sp ecified in th e Servic

• Check for accumulations of

t hings could be a fir e haza

damage to fuel lines, brake

and propeller shafts.

• After extended operation i

similar dirty conditions, have

brake linings, and axle yokes

ibl




g g ,

always a good idea to check for d amage.

• Completely inspect the und erbody of your vehicle.

Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and

exhaust system for damage.

soon as possible.

• If you experience u nusual v

mu d, slush or similar conditi

packed material. Packed fore

wheel imbalance and cleaninthe situation.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part o f the brakes may

cause excessive we ar or unpredictable braking. You

might not have full braking pow er when you need it

to prevent an accident. If you have been operating

your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes

checked and cleaned as necessary. Failure to do so

may result is serious injury.

WINCH USAGE – IF EQUIPPED

high forces and should be used

the winch without reading and

plete winch owner’s manual.

Tensioning the Wire Rope

The winch rope must be proper

Follow the instructions below t

1. Un-spool the wire rope leavi

winch drum.

2. Attach the h ook to a suitable

CAUTIO

START



Things To Know Before Using Your Winch

General Winch Information

You r veh icle is equ ipp ed w ith an electric vehicle recovery

winch. This w inch uses the electrical power from the

vehicle charging system to power a motor that windswire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc-

tion By nature a winch is capable of generating very

CAUTIO

Be certain the anchor will w

quired to tension the wire ro

3. Apply at least 500 lbs. of tension to the rope while

winding the rope in. Always u se care to ensure the rope

does not pile up on one side of the drum and is neatly

wound onto the drum.

CAUTION!

Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the

direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the

winch.

Low Voltage Interrupt

drops to a low level. The winch

for 30 seconds if this d evice is t

tripped, the vehicle should be o

few minutes to allow the veh

recover before continuing to wi

Winch Motor Thermal Protec

Your winch is equipp ed w ith a t

in the motor. If the winch is op

duration, the device may inte

protect the winch motor. During

power-out but will not power-in

to cool for a few minu tes before




Low Voltage Interrupt

Your winch is equipp ed w ith a d evice that w ill interrupt

winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage

winch w ill resume n ormal funct

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR WINCH

START



Winch Components

1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle

charging system and features a thermal p rotection switch

that automatically stops motor function in the power-in

direction if the motor gets too hot.

2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote

control to be attached to the control pack to allow the

winch to function.

3. Winch Drum w/ Integral Brake: The winch drumallow s t he w i re r ope t o be s t or ed on t he w i nch and

transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped

with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch

drum if the winch motor is stopped

6. Clutch Lever: The clutch leve

to be disconnected from the w

wire rope to be pulled from the

7. Remote Control: The remo

interface between the w inch ope

remote control provides the abil

out, and stop the w inch. To oper

switch is pressed dow n to p owe

pow er the w inch ou t. The w inch

left in the n eutral (center) posit

CAUTIO




drum if the winch motor is stopped.

4. 3 Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between

speed and pulling power.

5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be

connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.

CAUTIO

If not installed, the hook strap

hook.

Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a

and minimizes damage to the r

WINCH ACCESSORIES

The following accessories are necessary to attach the

winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe

winching.

Gloves: Wire rope, through

u se, w ill d e ve lo p barbs

which can slice skin. It is ex-

t rem ely im por tant t o w earprotective gloves while oper-

ating the winch or handling

the wire rope. Avoid loose fit-

ting clothes or anything that

Snat

prop

snatc

incre

pow

pul li

d a m

Prop

is cPull.

START



ting clothes or anything that

could become entangled in

the wire rope and other mov-

ing p arts.

Clevis/D-Shackles: The

D-Shackle is a safe means of

connecting the looped end s of

ca ble s, st ra p s a nd sn at ch

blocks. The shackle’s pin is

t hreaded t o allow eas y r e-

moval.

Tree Trunk Protector: Typi-

cally m ade of t ough, high-

quality nylon, it provides the

OPERATING YOUR WINCH

WARNIN

• Always use supplied hook strap to hold hook

• Never use as a hoist.

• Never use to move persons.

• Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capaci

• Always w ear heavy l eather gloves when hand

• Never touch w ire rope or hook while in tensi

• Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is

wire rope drum is moving.• Always stand clear of wire rope and load and

• Always keep hands and clothing clear of theduring operation and when spooling.

• Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Alwaystree trunk protector on the anchor.

• Never attach a recovery strap to the winch ho

• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recov




quality nylon, it provides the

operator an attachment point

for the winch rope to a wide

variety of anchor points and

objects, as well as protect liv-

ing trees.

• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovhook.

• Never use bungee straps that develop tramounts of force when stretched.

• Always disconnect the remote control when n

• Never winch when there are less than 5 wrap

• Always pass remote control through a windousing remote inside a vehicle.

• Never leave the remote control plugged into tsitting idle.

Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding injury.

General InformationPractice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key

points to remember w hen u sing your winch are:

1. Always take your time to assess the situation and plan

your pull carefully.

2. Always take your time when using a winch.

3. Use the right equipment for the situation.

4. Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire

rope to slip through your hands when h andling the rope.

5. Only the operator should handle the wire rope and

t t l

Vehicle Recovery Using the W

CAUTIO

• Alw ays Know Your Winch: Ta

understand the included InsGuide, and Basic Guide to Worder to understand your woperation.

• Always inspect winch installdition be fore operating w inchaged wire rope must be replacdamaged winch installation mdiately.

START



remote control.

6. Think safety at all times.

• Always be sure any element

safe wi nching operations is rewinching.

• Always keep remote control

wire rope and rigging.

• Inspect for cracks, pinches,

connections. Replace if dama

CAUTION!

Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar

through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for

proper snugness.

1. Inspect the winch, winch mdamage. Do not use the winch

rope shows excessive wear or d

2. Put on gloves.

3. Disengage clutch to allow fr

drum, rotate the clutch lever on

Freespooling conserves battery




4. Free the winch hook and attwinch hook from its anchor p o

the hook (if not attached).

Free Spool

START



5. Pull wire to anchor point. Pul

reach you r anchor p oint. Be sure

of tension on the wire as it c

Hook Str

over-wrap wh en slackened, leading to wire rope d amage.To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap while you

work.

Tree Trunk Pr




6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you’ve established

your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or

choker-chain aroun d the object.

CAUTIO

Always be certain the ancho

stand the load.

NOTE: How to choose an anchor point: A secureanchor is critical to winching op erations. An anchor m ust

be strong enough to hold while winching. Natural an-

chors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as

low as possible. If no natural anchors are available when

recovering another vehicle, you r vehicle becomes the

anchor p oint. In th is case, be sure to p ut th e transmission

in neutral, apply the hand brake and block its wh eels to

prevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll wantan an chor point that w ill enable you to pu ll straight in the

direction the vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope

to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An

anchor point as far away as possible will provide the Clevis/D-Sha

START



winch with its greatest pulling power.

7. Attach the Clevis/ D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.

Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain

and through the hook loop, being careful not to overtighten (tighten and back-off 1/ 2 turn).

8. Lock the clutch. Lock the wi

clutch lever on the winch to en

NOTE: Always ensure the cl

disengaged.

9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,located behind the front bu mp er. Be careful n ot to let the

remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you

choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle,

alw ays pas s t he r em ot e t hr ough a w i ndow t o avoid

pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the

remote control when not in use.

10. Put wire rope u nder tensiotrol switch, slowly wind the w

remains. Once the wire rope is

clear and never step over it.




11. Check your anchor. Make

secured and free of d ebris bef

winching procedure.

12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatlywound around the spooling drum. Improper winding

can cause d amage to the w ire rope.

13. may

blank

the w

ket c

the w

on th

twee

chorw i r e

sion. Do not approach or move

is applied. Do not allow it to ge

If necessary to move or remov

START



tension on the wire rope first.

14. Establish no people zone

clear. Be sure that everyone in

surrounding the winching operaof your intentions before you

spectators should no t stand - ne

the vehicle and never near the wire rope or snatchblock. Your situation may have o ther no people zones.

For additional assistance, the slowly driven wh ile being p ulle

pulling until the vehicle is on

able to drive the vehicle, the

complete.




15. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine

on and light tension already on the w ire rope, begin

winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire rope

is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum.

No People Zones

Using The Remo

NOTE: Avoid overheating the winch motor. For ex-tended winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow

the winch motor to cool down.

NOTE: What to look for under load: The wire rope

must always spool onto the drum as indicated by the

drum rotation decal on the w inch. As you power-in,

make sure the w ire rope w inds evenly and tightly on the

drum . This prevents the outer w ire wrap s from drawing

into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the wirerope. Avoid shock loads by using the control switch

intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock loads can

momentarily far exceed the winch and wire rope ratings.

During side p ulls the w ire rope tends to stack u p at one

end of the drum. This stack cancause serious damage to the w

straight ahead as possible and s

rope comes close to the tie rods

an uneven stack, spool out tha

reposition it to the opposite end

free up space for continued win

16. Secure vehicle. Once recove

plete, be sure to secure the vehtransmission in park (autom

manual transmissions. Release

17. Disconnect w ire rope. Disco

START



g p p p

18. Rewind wire rope. The p erson handling the wirerope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through

the hand, control the winch at all times.

WARNIN

To prevent serious injury, NE

inside the hook area as you a

NOTE: How to sp ool u nd e

remote control lead so it canno

Arrange the wire rope so it will

spooled. Be sure any wire ropedrum is wound tightly and eve

straighten the layer if necessa

under l ight tension and spool

onto the winch drum in even la




tighten and straighten the layers

process until the winch hook is

full length of the remote contro

the hook between your thumb athe hook strap. Hold the hook

and forefinger to keep tension o

wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in theremaining wire rope. By pulsing the remote control

switch.

19. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow

hook.

20. Disconnect remote controlcontrol cord from the control bo

dry place. Winching operation

the cap on the solenoid plug-in

NOTE: Always store the remo

clean, dry area.

RIGGING TECHNIQUES

Various winching situations wother winching techniques. The

little distance to achieve maxim

line rigging, simply increasing

taining a straight-line pu lling si

START



g g p g

assess what technique is correct

safety at all times.

How to change the pulling direction: All winching op erations shou ldthe winch to the object being pu

wire rope collecting on one sid

pu lling efficiency an d damagi

block, secured to a point direct

will enable you to change your

still allowing the wire rope to b

onto the spooling drum.

Change Pulling Directions




Change Pulling Directions

Increasing pulling power: Double Line:

Because pulling power decreaIncrease Pulling Power

START



In some cases, you may find yourself needing more

pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases me-

chanical advantage and that increases your pulling

power:

Because pulling power decrea

layers of wire rope on the win

snatch block to double l ine ou

decreases the nu mber of layers o

and increases pulling p ower. Stawire rope to free the winch hook

Increase Pulling Power

vehicle’s frame/ tow hook and run the wire rope througha snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the

snatch block, pull out enough wire to reach your anchor

point. Do not attach hook to mounting kit. Secure to the

anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain.

Attach the clevis/ shackle. Attach the shackle to the two

ends of the strap/ chain, being careful not to ov er tighten

(tighten and back-off 1/ 2 tu rn).

PARKING BRAKEThe foot operated parking brake is positioned below the

lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the

parking brake, pu ll the p arking brake release handle.

NOTE: Th i t t l t d b k i li ht Be sure the parking brake is fir

Parking Brake




NOTE: The instrument cluster red brake warning light

will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake

is applied. You mu st be su re that the parking brake is

fully app lied before leaving th e veh icle.

Be sure the parking brake is fir

the gear shift lever is in the

parking on a hill you should a

before placing the gear shift leve

load on th e transmission lockingdifficult to move the selector ou

WARNING!

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage

or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic

transmission in Park, a manual transmission in

Reverse or First gear. Failure to do so may allow

the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leavingchildren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for

a number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys

in the ignition. A child could operate power

i d th t l th hi l

When parking on a hill, turn thecurb on a d ownhill grade and a

up hill grade.

The parking brake should alwa

the driver is not in the vehicle.

BRAKE SYSTEMIf power assist is lost for an

repeated brake ap plications wbrakes will still function. Howev

substantial increase in braking

If either the front or rear hydra

capability, the remaining system

START



window s, other controls, or move the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake

problems due to excessive heating of the rearbrakes.

p y g y

some loss of overall braking ef

evident by increased pedal tr

greater pedal force required to

tion of the BRAKE warning lamequipped) during brake use.

Brake NoiseDuring normal operation of the brake system certain

noises m ay be present from time to time. Occasional

groan or squeal noises may occur during normal

operation of the brake system which may not be indica-

tive of a p roblem. These noises may be heard at any time

the brakes are applied but m ay be more noticeable du ring

the first few brake app lications in the m orning. Moisture,

hot or cold temperature, dust, and or other debris may

also contribute to the noise condition. Repeated or con-

tinuous noises during braking may be an indication that

the brake linings are worn and in need of replacement.

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)— IfE i d

The system’s pump motor runprovide regulated hydraulic pr

makes a low humming noise d

normal.

When you are in a severe brak

use of the Anti-lock Brake Sys

some p edal d rop as the vehicle

This is the result of the system r

system and is normal.

Engagement of the Anti-lock

accomp anied by a p ulsing sensa

clicking noise. These occurrenc

cate that the system is function




EquippedThis Anti-lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver

in maintaining vehicle control u nder adverse braking

conditions. The system operates with a separate com-

puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel

lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

cate that the system is function

ABS Warning Light

The Anti-lock Brake System in

light. Wh en the light is illumin

System is not functioning. The s

non-anti-lock brakes.

WARNING!

Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their

effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping

makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly

on your brake pedal when you need to slow dow n or

stop.

WARNIN

• Anti-lock system (ABS) ca

ral laws of physics from ac

can it increase braking or

yond that afforded by the c

brakes and tires or the trac

• The ABS cannot preven

those resulting from excefollowing another vehicle

planing. Only a safe, atten

can prevent accidents.

• The capabilities of an ABS

b l i d i

START



never be exploited in a

manner which could jeopa

or the safety of others.

POWER STEERINGThe standard power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical

steering capability if pow er assist is lost.

If for som e reason, the p ower assist is interrupted , it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-

tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering

effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and duringparking man euvers.

NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering

wh eel travel are considered norm al and d oes not indicate

that there is a p roblem w ith the pow er steering system.

WARNIN

Continued operation with re

assist could pose a safety risk

Service should be obtained a

CAUTIO

Prolong operation of the stee

of the steering w heel travel w

fluid temperature and shou

possible. Damage to the pow

occur




p p g y

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering

pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is

du e to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This

noise should be considered normal, and d oes not in any

way damage the steering system.

occur.

MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS) - 5.7LEngine OnlyThis feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting

off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load

and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no

driver inputs or additional driving skills required.

NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return

to full fun ctionality after a battery d isconnect.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

START



NOTE:

• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizin

standards. P-Metric tires ha

into the sidewall preceding

ample: P215/ 65R15 95H.

• European Metric t ire sizing is based on Europeandesign stand ards. Tires designed to th is stand ard h ave

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H

• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-ing the size designation. Example: LT235/ 85R16.

• Temporary Spare tires arespares designed for tempor

Tires d esigned to this stand

molded into the sidewall pre

tion. Example: T145/ 80D18 1

• High Flotation tire sizing i

standards and it begins with

into the sidew all. Examp le: 3




Tire Sizing ChartEXAMPLE:

Size Designation:

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards

....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards

LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards

T = Temporary Spare tire

31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)

215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)

65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)

—Ratio of section height to section w idth of tire.

10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)

R = Construction Code

START



R = Construction Code

—R means Radial Construction.

—D means Diagonal or Bias Construction.

15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)

EXAMPLE:Service De scription:

95 = Load Index

—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can

H = Speed Symbol—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carrto its load index under certain operating conditions.—The m aximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol shoul

der specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loadinand posted speed limits).

Load Identification:

....blank.... = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard

Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire

Ligh t Load Light L d Ti




Ligh t Load = Light Load Tire

C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a sp

Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to ca

Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire intire.

Tire Identification Number (TIN)The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;however, the date code may only be on one side. Tireswith white sidewalls will have the full TIN includingdate code located on the w hite sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboatires as mounted on the vehicle. the outboard side then you w ill of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

D OT = Department of Transportation

—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance w ith the U.S. Departm ensafety standards, and is approved for h ighway use.

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)

ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)

03 = N um ber representing the w eek in w hich the tire was manufactured (2 digits)

START



03 = N um ber representing the w eek in w hich the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.

01 = N um ber representing the year in w hich the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)

—01 m eans the year 2001.—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number which the tire was manufactured Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week o



3) the tire size designed for your vehicle4) the cold tire inflation pressures for th e front, rearand spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and LoadingInformation” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-

tion of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear

occupan ts and cargo sho uld nevlbs.” on the Tire and Loading I

combined weight of occupan

trailer ton gue weight (if app lica

the weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct L

1. Locate the statement “The c

pants and cargo should never e

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined w

passengers that will be riding i

3. Subtract the combined weig

f XXX kil

START



axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the

“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle locate the statement “The combined weight of

sengers from XXX kilograms or

4. The resulting figure equals

cargo and luggage load capacity

amount equals 1400 lbs. and th

passengers in you r vehicle, the amou nt of available cargoand luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,

and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from you r

trailer w ill be tran sferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE: The following table shcalculate total load, cargo/ lugg

ties of your vehicle with varyin

and number and size of occu

illustration purposes only and

the seating and load carry capa

NOTE: For the following exam

of occupants and cargo should n

Kg).




START



WARNING!

Overloading of your tires i s dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMTire PressureProper tire inflation pressure is

satisfactory operation of your

areas are affected by improper




1. Safety—

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause

accidents.

• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in

tire failure.

• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock.

Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damagethat result in tire failure.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.

You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle

handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control

2. Economy—Improper inflation pressures

patterns to develop across the ti

wear patterns will reduce tread l

earlier tire replacement. Under

tire rolling resistance and result

tion.

3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle S

Proper tire inflation contributeOver inflation prod uces a jarring

Tire Inflation PressuresThe proper cold tire inflation pr

the face of the driver’s door or

pillar

START



vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to

the other can cause the vehi cle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-mended cold tire inflation pressure.

pillar.

Some vehicles may have Sup

Information for vehicle loads

maximum loaded vehicle cond ition. These pressure con-ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information” section of this manual.

check tire pressure. Do not mwh en d etermining prop er inflat

properly inflated even wh en th

CAUTIO

After inspecting or adjusting

ways reinstall the valve stem

will prevent moisture and dvalve stem, which could dam

Inflation pressures specified on

“cold tire inflation pressure.” C

is defined as the tire pressure




The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as

inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at leastonce a month. Use a good qu ality pocket-type gauge to

p

been d riven for at least 3 hour s,

(1 km) after a 3 hour period

pressure must not exceed the msure molded into the tire sidew

Tire Placard Location

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide rangeof outdoor temperatures, as t ire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by app roximately 1 p si (7 kPa) per

12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the

outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tireinflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

wh ich equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this

outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure m ay increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

d i i O O d hi l

Tire Pressures for High SpeeThe manufacturer advocates

within posted speed limits. Whe

tions are such that the vehicl

speeds, maintaining correct tire

important. Increased tire press

loading may be required for hi

tion. Refer to original equipm

dealer for recommended safe o

and cold tire inflation pressures

START



du ring operation. DO NOT redu ce this n ormal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75

mph (120 km/h).

Radial-Ply Tires

WARNIN

Combining radial ply tires w

on your vehicle will cause y

poorly. The instability could

ways use radial ply tires in se

of trucks with dual rear wh

them with other types of tire

Cuts and punctures in radial tir

the tread area because of sidew

authorized tire dealer for radial




Compact Spare Tire — If EquippedThe compact spare is for temporary emergency use with

radial t ires. It is engineered to be used on your style

vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the

original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-

stalled at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Temporary use spare tires are for emergency useonly. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear

indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which

D o not i ns t al l a w heel coverconventional tire on the compa

wheel is designed specifically f

Do not install more than one c

on the vehicle at any given tim

CAUTIO

Because of the reduced groundyour vehicle through an autom

compact spare installed. Dam

result.

START



replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which

apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Limited Use Spare — If EquippedThe limited u se spare tire is for temp orary em ergency u se

on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use

spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare

tire and wheel assembly. This t ire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,

replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the

vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNIN

The limited use spare tires a

only. Installation of this limite

vehicle handling. With this t

than 60 mph (100 km/h). Ke

tire inflation pressure liste

placard or limited use spare ti

Replace (or repair) the ori

opportunity and reinstall it oto do so could result in loss o

Tire SpinningWhen stu ck in mu d, sand , snow

spin your vehicle’s wheels abov




spin your vehicle’s wheels abov

Refer to the paragraph on “Free

Section 6 of this manual.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure

someone. D o not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster

than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds

continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let

anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the

speed.

Tread Wear IndicatorsTread wear indicators are in th e original equipment tires

to help you in determining when your t ires should be

replaced

These ind icators are molded int

grooves. They will appear as ban

becomes 1/ 16 inch (2 mm). Whe

START



replaced.tread wear indicators, the tire s

Many states have laws requirin

point.

Life of TireThe service life of a t ire is d ependent upon varying

factors including but not limited to:

• Driving style

• Tire pressure

• Distance d riven

WARNING!

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this w arning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have an accident result-

ing in serious injury or death

Keep dismounted tires in a coo

exposure to light as possible. P

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement TiresThe tires on you r new vehicle p

characteristics. They shou ld be

wear and correct cold tire infla

facturer strongly recommends t

lent to the originals in size, q

when replacement is needed (r

“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer

Information” placard for the size

The service d escription an d lo

found on the original equipm

equivalent replacement tires m




ing in serious injury or death. equivalent replacement tires m

safety, hand ling, and r ide of you

that you contact your original

rized tire dealer with any q uestispecifications or capability.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that

specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of un-approved tires and w heels may change suspensiondimensions and performance characteristics, resultingin changes to steering, handling, and braking of yourvehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling andstress to steering and suspension components. Youcould lose control and have an accident resulting in

serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,

other than what was originally equipped on yourvehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index couldresult in tire overloading and failure. You could losecontrol and have an accident.

CAUTIO

Replacing original tires with

may result in false speedomet

ings.

Alignment And BalancePoor suspension alignment may

• Fast tire wear.

• Uneven tire w ear, such as f

wear.

• Vehicle pull to right or left.

Tires may also cause the vehicle

START



• Failure to equip your vehicle w ith tires having ad-

equate speed capability can result in sudden tirefailure and loss of vehicle control.

Tires may also cause the vehicle

Alignment will not correct this c

for proper diagnosis.

Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.

Vibration may be a result of t ire and wheel out-of-

balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and

avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.

SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION – IF EQUIPPEDA light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-

gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.

Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehiclewill be found on the face of the driver’s door.

TIRE CHAINSUse “Class U” chains on Power Wagon models, or other

traction a ids that meet SAE Type “U” specifications.

CAUTIO

To avoid damage to your vehicle, tfollowing precautions:

• Because of limited chain clearansuspension components, it is imin good condition are used. serious vehicle damage. Stop tnoise occurs that could suggesthe damaged parts of the chain

•Install chains as tightly as poafter driving about 1/2 mile (0.

• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/

• Drive cautiously and avoid seveespecially with a loaded vehicl

• Do not install tire chains on fr

• Do not drive for a prolonged p




NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,

as recommended by the chain manufacturer.• Observe the tire chain manu

method of installation, operatfor usage. Always use the lo

speed of the chain manufactspeed recommended by the ma

These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-

ing link and cable (radial) chains.

NOTE: On 4x4 Power Wagon models, class “U” snow

chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles

equipped with LT285/ 70R17D.

CAUTION!

Do not use tire chains on the 4X4 front wheels of Ram Trucks equipped wi th LT285/70R17D. There

may not be adequate clearance for the chains and

you are risking structural or body damage to your

vehicle.

SNOW TIRESSnow tires should be of the sam

tion as the front tires. Consult

snow tire to determine any m

requirement associated with the

always be operated at the ve

inflation pressures under any lo

While studded tires improve p

and traction capability on wet

poorer than that of non-studde

hibit studd ed tires; therefore

checked before using these tire

START



TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONSTires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at

different loads and perform different steering, d riving,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on On/ Off Road

type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-

tain mu d, snow, and w et traction levels, and contribute toa smooth, quiet ride.

Follow the recomm ended tire rotation frequency for you r

type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”

Section of this m anu al. More frequent rotation is perm is-

sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual

NOTE: On Canadian vehicles

equipped with All-Season typ

ON/ OFF Road type tires mount

f t t b k t ti tt




y p

wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-

formed.

a front to back rotation pattern.

side to side at the recommende

FUEL REQUIREMENTSThe 5.7L engine is designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide satisfac-

tory fuel economy and performance when

using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-

ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu -

facturer recommends the use of 89 octane

for optimum performance.The routine use

of premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of

premium gasoline w ill provide no benefit over highquality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some

circumstances may result in poorer performance.

Light spark knock at low engine speed s is not harmful to

your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at

high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is

Poor quality gasoline can caus

starting, stalling and hesitation

symptoms, try another brand o

fore considering service for the

Over 40 auto manufacturers wo

end orsed consistent gasoline s

wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) t

necessary to deliver enhanced

and durability for your vehicle

of gasolines that meet the WW

are available.

Reformulated GasolineMany areas of the country req

burning gasoline referred to as “

R f l t d li t i

5.7L Engines

START



g p g

required.Reformu lated gasolines contain

cifically blended to reduce ve

prove air qu ality.

We strongly supp ort the use of reformulated gasolines.

Properly blended reformulated gasolines w ill provide

excellent performance and durability for the engine and

fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate BlendsSome fuel sup pliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-

genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-

ates are required in some areas of the country during the

winter months to redu ce carbon monoxide emissions.

Fuels blended with these oxygenates m ay be used in

your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL

MMT In GasolineMMT is a m anganese-containin

blended into some gasoline to i

blended with MMT provide no

beyond gasolines of the same

MMT. Gasolines blended with

life and reduce emission system

mend that gasolines free of MM

The MMT content of gasoline

the gasoline pump; therefore, yline retailer whether or not h

MMT.

It is even more important to lo

MMT in Canada because MM

higher than allowed in the Uni




DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL.

Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical

fuel system components.

g

hibited in Federal and Californi

Sulfur In GasolineIf you live in the northeast United States, your vehicle

may have been designed to meet California low em ission

standard s w ith Cleaner-Burn ing California reformulated

gasoline with low sulfur. If such fuels are not available in

states adopting California emission standards, your ve-

hicles will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal

specifications, bu t emission control system performance

may be adversely affected. Gasoline sold outside of

California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels whichmay affect the performance of the vehicle’s catalytic

converter. This may cause the Check Engine or Service

Engine Soon light to illuminate. We recommend that you

try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower

sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related prior to

returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for ser

CAUTIO

If the Check Engine or Servi

flashing, immedi ate service is

diagnostics system section.

Materials Added To FuelAll gasolines sold in the Unite

contain effective detergent adddetergents or other additives is

conditions and would result in

fore, you should not have to ad

START



returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for ser-

vice.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

Using leaded gasoline can impair engine p erforman ce,damage the emission control system.

• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or

lf i i d i i di i

• When pulling a heavy load o

vehicle when the humidity is

is high, use a premium unlea

spark knock. If spark knock p

or engine piston damage ma

• The use of fuel additives whi

octane enhancers is not recom

products contain high conc

Fuel system d amage or vehic

resulting from the u se of such

the responsibility of the man

NOTE: Intentional tampering

systems can result in civil p

against you .




malfunctioning and may require immediate service.

Contact your dealer for service assistance.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas w hich can kill.

N ever r un t he engine in a closed area, s uch as a

garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine run ning for an extend ed p eriod. If the vehicle is

stopped in an open area with the engine running for

more than a short p eriod, adjust the ven tilation system

• Guard against carbon monox

nance. Have the exhaust syst

the vehicle is raised. Have a

repaired promptly. Until rep

windows fully op en.

• Keep the liftgate closed whe

prevent carbon monoxide a

haust gases from entering the

ADDING FUEL

Adding Fuel (Gas Engines)The fuel tank filler tube has a

inches (50 mm) inside the ope

fuel container, i t should have

enough to force open the restric

START



to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.g p

CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control

system could result from using an improper fuel

tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap

could let impurities into the fuel system. Also a

poorly fitted after-market cap can cause the MIL

(Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate, due to

fuel vapors escaping from the system.

CAUTION!

A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction

Indicator Light to turn on.

CAUTIO

To avoid fuel spillage and o

off” the fuel tank after filling

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle

fuel tank is full.

WARNIN

• Never have any smoking m

the vehicle when the gas

tank filled.

• Never add fuel to the vehi

running. This is in violat




running. This is in violat

federal fire regulations an

function Indicator Light to

NOTE: Tighten the gas cap 1/ 4 turn until you hear one

click. This is an indication that the cap is p roperly

tightened.

If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction

Indicator Light will come on, Be sure the gas cap is

tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

WARNING!

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be b urned. Alw ays place gas containers on the

ground while filling.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

cluster. Tighten the gas cap un

heard. This is an indication tha

tightened. Press the odometer

message off. If the problem pe

appear the next time the vehic

indicate a damaged cap. If the p

in a r ow, t he s ys tem w i ll t u

Indicator Light (MIL). Resolvi

the MIL light off.

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification LabelAs requ ired by N ational Highw

istration Regulations, your ve

label affixed to th e d river’s side

START



Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicles d iagnostic system d etermines that the fuel

filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a

GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument

This label contains the m onth a

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GV

Rating (GAWR) front an d rear, Number (VIN) A Month Day

included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and

Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on thebottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.

The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and

rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so

GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is d efined as the allowable load

weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the

driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

G A l W i ht R ti (GAWR)

Each axle GAWR is determined

system with the lowest load springs, tires or wheels). Heav

components sometimes specifie

creased du rability does not nece

cle’s GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Label rep res

your vehicle. Replacement tires

capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is app

listed.

Inflation Pressure

Thi i th ld ti i fl ti




Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front

and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargoarea so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

This is the cold tire inflation pre

all loading conditions up to full

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weightof the veh icle w ith all fluid s, includ ing veh icle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo

loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are

added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and

rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined

by weighing it when it is loaded an d read y for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-

cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.

The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should

or rear axles has been exceed

within the specified GVWR. If sfrom front to rear or rear to fron

specified weight limitations ar

items down low and be sure tha

equally. Stow all loose items se

Improp er weight d istributions c

on the w ay your vehicle steers

the brakes operate.

CAUTIO

Do not load your vehicle

GVWR or the maximum fron

you do, parts on your vehicl

START



g

then be determined separately to be sure that the load is

properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing

the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front

y p y

change the way your vehicl

cause you to lose control.

shorten the life of your vehic

An EXAMPLE of a loaded vehicle is shown in the

following chart. Note that neither GVWR nor GAWRcapabilities are exceeded. Overloading can cause poten-

tial safety hazards and shorten service life.

NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not

necessarily the weights for your vehicle. Also, the

amount of load added to both the front and rear axles

can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed

both in its curb weight condition, and in its loaded

and ready for operation condition.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating




TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and informationon limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do

with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-

view this information to tow your load as efficiently and

safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements

and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-

hicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing DefinitionsThe follow ing trailer tow ing related d efinitions w ill assist

you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

The GVWR is the total allowablThis includes driver, passeng

weight. The total load must be l

exceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The gross trailer weight (GTW) i

plus the w eight of all cargo, con

(permanent or temp orary) loade

loaded and ready for operatiomend ed w ay to measure GTW i

trailer on a vehicle scale. The en

mu st be supp orted by the scale

START



Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the totalpermissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when

weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-

clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a

driver).

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front orrear GAWR.

WARNIN

It is important that you do no

front or rear GAWR. A dange

can result if either rating is ex

control of the vehicle and hav

Tongue Weight (TW)

The downw ard force exerted

trailer. In most cases it shouldmo re than 15% of the trailer loa

as part of the load on your veh




Frontal Area

The maximu m height and m aximu m w idth of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be

installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue

that typically provides adjustable friction associated with

the telescoping motion to d ampen any unw anted trailer

swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or

some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of

hitches are the most popular on the market today and

they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A w eight-distributing system wage through spring (load) bars

for heavier loads, to distribute

the tow vehicle’s front axle and

used in accordan ce with th e m a

provides for a more level ride,

steering and brake control the

safety. The add ition of a friction

also damp ens sway caused by trcontributes positively to tow ve

Trailer sway control and a w

equalizing) hitch are recomme

Weights (TW) and may be requi

and Trailer configuration / load

axle weight rating (GAWR) req

START



trailers.

WARNING!

An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch

system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-

formance, and could result in an accident.

Weight D istributing Sy stems may not be compatible

with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult w ith your hitch

and trailer m anufacturer or a reputable Recreational

Vehicle dealer for additional information.

Weight Distributing




Fifth-Wheel Hitch

A special high p latform w ith a coupling that m oun ts over

Gooseneck Hitch

The gooseneck hitch employs which attaches to a ball moun te

truck. The coupling arm conne

over the rear axle in the truck b

Trailer Hitch ClassificationThe rear bumper is intended to

lbs (907 kg) without added equ

the standard equipment. Your

equipped for safe towing of trailbs (907 kg) with the optional T

See your dealer for package con

The following chart provides t

the maximum trailer weight a gi

tow and should be used to ass

il hi h f i

Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System

START



A special high p latform w ith a coupling that m oun ts over

the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects

a vehicle and fifth-wh eel trailer with a coupling king p in.

correct trailer hitch for your in

Refer to “Trailer Towing We

Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains

the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.

Trailer Hitch Classification

Class Max. GTW (Gro ss TrailerWt.)

Cla ss I - Lig ht D uty 2,000 lb s (907 k g)

Class II - MediumDuty

3,500 lbs (1587 kg)

C lass III - H eavy D uty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)

Class IV - ExtraHeavy Duty

10,000 lbs (4540 kg)

Fifth Wheel/ Gooseneck

Greater than 10,000 lbs (4540kg )

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on

your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Max

Ratings)

NOTE: For add itional trailer to

mum trailer weight ratings) refe

addresses:

• http:// ww w.dodge.com/towi

• http:// www.dodge.ca (Canad

Trailer and Tongue WeightAlways load a trailer with 60%

the front of the trailer. This pl

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) o

vehicle. Loads balanced over the

rear can cause the trailer to sw

which will cause loss of contr

F il t l d t il h i




Failure to load trailers h eavier

many trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on

your bu mper or trailer hitch.

C onsider t he follow ing it em s w hen com put ing t he

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The weight of any other typ

put in or on your vehicle.

• The weight of the driver and

NOTE: Remember that every

trailer adds to the load on your

factory-installed options, or

must be considered as p art of

vehicle. Refer to the Tire and L

ard in the Tire Safety InformatioTowing RequirementsTo promote proper break-in of

etrain components the followin

mended:

START



• The tongue weight of the trailer.

CAUTION!

• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805

km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage

your axles, driveline and vehicle.

• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer

towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).

Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this

manu al. When tow ing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,

or GCWR, ratings.

WARNIN

Improper towing can lead

Follow these guidelines to ma

as safe as possible:

Make certain that the load is

and will not shift during t

cargo that is not fully secure

can occur that may be diffi

control. You could lose contrhave an accident.

• When hauling cargo or towi

load your vehicle or trailer.

loss of control, poor p erforma

axle, engine, transmission, st




axle, engine, transmission, st

sis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to theframe or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the

chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough

slack for turning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be p arked on a grade.

When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow

vehicle. Put the tow vehicle au tomatic transmission in

P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the

transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drivevehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral.

Always, block or chock the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow

vehicle and the trailer such that the following four

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for

(This requirement may lim

achieve the 10% to 15% ran

percentage of total trailer we

Towing Requirements — Tire

− Do not attempt to tow a trailspare tire.

− Proper tire inflation pressure

and satisfactory operation of

Tires–General Information s

Tire Pressures for p roper tire

Also check the trailer tires

START



ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

− Also, check the trailer tires

pressures before trailer usage

− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–GeneralInformation section of this manual on Tread Wear

Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.

− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-

ma tion section of this man ual on Rep lacement Tires for

proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires

with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase

the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle w ith that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible

personal injury.

− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

actuated brakes. When towin

a hyd raulic surge actuated brbrake controller is not requir

− Trailer brakes are recommend

lbs (454 kg) and required for

lbs (907 kg).

CAUTIO

If the trailer weighs more t

loaded, it should have its

should be of adequate capa

could lead to accelerated bra

brake pedal effort, and longe




− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

required when towing a trailer with electronically

WARNING!

Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-

draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-

tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes

when you need them and could have an accident.

Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-

tance. When towing you should allow for additional

space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front

of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,

stop lights and tu rn signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

Th T il T P k g m i l d 4 d 7 i

NOTE: Do not cut or splice

wiring harness.

The electrical connections are a

but you must mate the harne

Refer to the following illustrati

START



The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin

wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness

and connector.4 - Pin Conn



NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level

before tow ing.

Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped)

To red uce p otential for au tomatic transmission overheat-

ing, turn the “TOW HAUL OD/ OFF” feature ON when

driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive

position 2 on more severe grades.

Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If

Equipped)

− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

− When using the speed control, if you experience speed

drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/ h), disengage until

you can get back to cruising speed.

− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to

i i f l ffi i

Towing Tips — Cooling Syst

To reduce p otential for engineheating, take the following acti

− City Driving

When stopp ed for short periods

in neutral and increase engine i

− Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

−Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

− refer to Cooling System Ope

Maintenance section of this m

tion.

START



ma ximize fuel efficiency.

Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are d esigned with an adjustable m irrorhead to p rovide a greater vision range when towing

extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-

board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or

In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main

mirror surface.

NOTE: Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors

rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing

mirrors forward. The 7 x 10 inch trailer towing

mirrors are not designed to be folded forward and

doing so will damage the mirrors and/or vehicle.

Blindspot M




g g

SNOWPLOW

Dodge Power Wagon Model

NOTE: Do not use Dodge Po

snowplow applications.

WARNIN

Snowplows and other af

should not be added to the fro

The airbag crash sensors m

change in the front end struct

deploy une xpectedly or could

collision resulting in serious

Trailer Towing Position

START



CAUTION!

Using this vehicle for snow plow applications can

cause damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could ad-

versely affect performance of the airbag system in anaccident. Do not expect that the airbag will perform

as described earlier in this manual

RECREATIONAL TOWING —

VEHICLES (BEHIND MOTOR

CAUTIO

Internal damage to the trans

front or rear wheel lift is u

towing.

NOTE: The transfer case mus(N) for recreational towing. A

must be placed in P (Park)

towing. Manu al transmissions m

neutral) for recreational towin

proper transfer case Neutral shi

vehicle.




Recreational Towing Procedure — Manual Shift

Transfer Case — If EquippedUse the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

recreational towing:

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that

the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL) before

recreational towin g to prevent damage to internalparts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Shut OFF the engine.

3. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Shift transfer case lever into

6. Start the engine.

7. Shift autom atic transmission

8. Release brake pedal for five

there is no vehicle movement.

9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with th

(D).

10. Shu t OFF the engine and plaunlocked OFF position.

11. Shift automatic transmission

12. Apply the parking brake.

13. Attach vehicle to tow vehic

14 Release the parking brake

START



4. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or

depress the clutch on manual transmissions.

14. Release the parking brake.

CAUTION!

Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if

the transmission is shifted into P (PARK) with the

transfer case in N (NEUTRAL) and the engine RUN-

NING. With the transfer case in N (NEUTRAL)

ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the

transmission into P (PARK)

Returning to Normal Operation — Manual ShiftTransfer CaseUse the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

normal u sage:

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Shut OFF the engine.

4. Shift automatic transmissio

depress the clutch on manual tr

5. Shift transfer case lever to de

6. Shift automatic transmission

WARNIN

You or others could be inj

vehicle unattended with the

(NEUTRAL) position withou

the parking brake. The transf

position disengages both the

shafts from the pow ertrain a

hicle to move regardless of

tion. The parking brake sho

when the driver is not in the




3. Depress the brake pedal.

CAUTION!

• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar

on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be

damaged.

• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because

fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage

the internal parts.

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATIO

The equipment Identification Plinner surface.

The following information ab

played on this plate: Model, Wh

cation Number, Truck Order Nu

with descriptions of all produ

ment on the truck as shipped fr

NOTE: Always refer to the E

Plate When Ordering Parts.

START



WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366

Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

▫All Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367

Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368

▫ Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369

Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . .

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . .

Emergency Tow Hooks — If

Towin g A Disabled Vehicle .

▫ 4-Wheel-Drive Vehicles . .

Winch Usage . . . . . . . . . . .



HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

The Hazard Warning switch is mounted on the top of thesteering column as shown in the illustration.

To engage th e Hazard Warning lights, depress the button

h f h i l Wh h H d

will flash off and on to warn

emergency. Push the button a seflashers.

This is an emergency warning s

used when the vehicle is in m

vehicle is d isabled and is crea

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehic

Hazard Warning lights will co

though the ignition switch is OF

NOTE: With extended use, th

may discharge your battery.

Hazard Light Warning Switch

366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES



on the top of the steering column. When the Hazard

Warning switch is activated, all directional turn signals

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.

The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.

You could be crushed. Never put any part of your

body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Neve r start

or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If

you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a

service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing

tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the

vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should

be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or

slippery areas.

All Models

The jack and jack t ools are passenger seat. Lift the flap on

access.

Remove the jack and tools by rem

sliding the assembly from unde

WHAT TO



WARNING!

After using the jack and tools, alw ays reinstall them

in the original carrier and location. While driving

you may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-

tion, or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or

other objects in the vehicle may move around with

force, resulting in serious injury.

JACKING INSTRUCTIONS

Removing The Spare TireRemove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.

Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert

the tube through the access hole between the lower

tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch

mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun-

l k i il h i i h d i h

the vehicle. When the spare is cl

end of the cable and pull i t thwheel.

It is recommended that you s

avoid tangling the loose cable.




terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with

enough cable slack to allow you to pu ll it out from un der

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with

the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or otherpower tools is not recommended and can damage the

winch.

Tire Changing Procedure

WARNING!

Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. Youcould be crushed. Never get any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run

the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need

to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service

center where it can be raised on a lift.

Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack The jack is

It is not recommended that the

purposes or to lift more than onPreparations

Park the vehicle on a firm level

slippery areas. Set the parking

selector in PARK (automatic tra

(manual transmission). On fo

shift the transfer case to the “4L

WARNIN

Do not attempt to change a

vehicle close to moving traff

the road to avoid the dang

operating the jack or changin

• Turn on the Hazard Warning

WHAT TO



Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The jack is

designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning

• Block both the front and rear

of the wheel diagonally opp o-site the jacking position. For

exam ple, if t he r ight fr ont

wh eel is being changed , block

the left rear wheel.

• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the

vehicle is being jacked.

Instructions

WARNIN

Carefully follow these tire cha

prevent personal injury or da

• Always park on a firm, lev

the edge o f the roadway as

the vehicle.

• Block the w heel diagonally

be raised.• Apply the parking brake f

• Never start the engine with

• Do not let anyone sit in th

a jack.

• Do not get under the vehic

• Only use the jack in the p

• If working on or near a r




• If working on or near a r

careful of motor traffic.

1. Remove the sp are wh eel, jack, and tools from storage.

2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one

turn while the wheel is still on the ground .

3. For Power Wagon, when changing the front wheel,

assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the

drive tu be to the extension tube. Place the jack u nd er the

axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes

extending to the front. Connect the jack tube extension

and wheel wrench.

When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive

t ube t o t he jack and connect t he d r ive t ube t o t he

extension tube. Place the jack und er the axle between th e

s pring and t he s hock abs or ber w i th t he dr ive t ubes

extending to the rear. Connect the jack tube extension and

wheel w rench.

Before raising the w heel off the

the jack will not damage surroadjust the jack position as req

NOTE: If the jack will not lo

(thumb wheel) by hand, it may

jack drive tube in order to lowe

WHAT TO



4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the

vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.

WARNIN

Raising the vehicle higher th

the vehicle unstable and caus

slip off the jack and hurt som

vehicle only enough to remo

5. Remove the wheel nuts and p

the spare wheel and w heel nuts

of the nuts toward the wheel on6. Using the wheel wrench, fi

using a crisscross pattern. Corre

lbs. (183 N·m) torque.If in doub

ness, have them checked with

dealer or at a service station.




WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle.

Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and

wheel in the places provided.

7. Remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or alu-

minum wheel center caps on the spare w heel. This m ay

result in cap damage.8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the jack

will not lower by turning the dial (thumb wheel) by

hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in

order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and

tools as previously described.

9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel stud

not substitute w ith chrome p latHub Caps

The hub caps mu st be removed

off the ground .

For 2500/ 3500 single rear wh ee

blade on the end of the lug w ren

Insert the blade end into the p

pop off the hub cap with a back

CAUTIO

Use a back and forth motion

Do not use a twisting motio

hub cap, damage to the hub c

WHAT TO



Wheel Nuts

All wheel nu ts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the

bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is

especially important during the first few hundred miles

of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly

set. All n uts should first be firmly seated against the

wheel. The nuts should then be tightened to recom-

m ended t or que. Tighten t he nut s t o final t or que in

increments. Progress aroun d the bolt circle, tightening

the nu t opp osite to the nut just previously tightened un tilfinal torque is achieved. Recommended torques are

shown in the following chart.

DiscWheels

Type Nut Stud Size TorqueFt. Lbs.

TorqueNewtonMeters

Con e 9/ 16-18 120-150 160-200

Flanged 9/ 16 18 130 160 190 220

To Stow The Flat Or Spare

Turn the wheel so that the valvw heel r et ainer t hrough t he ce

position it properly across the w

For convenience in checking the

with the valve stem toward the

Attach the w heel wrench to th e e

winch mechanism until the wh

against the und erside of the ve

until you feel the winch mechatimes. It cannot be overtighten

several times to be sure it is firm




Flanged 9/ 16-18 130-160 190-220

HOISTINGA conventional floor jack may be u sed at the jacking

locations, refer to the graph ics th at show jacking loca-

tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist m ust never be

used on any other parts or the underbody.

CAUTION!

Nev er use a floo r jack directly under the diffe rential

housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle

may result.

JUMP-STARTINGYou should n ot try to start you

towing. Vehicles equipped with

sion cannot be started this way

vehicle equipped with a manua

heat and damage the catalytic c

greater risk of an accident when

or tow ed. If the vehicle has a d i

cables may be u sed to obtain

battery or the battery in another

can be dangerous if done improcedure carefully.

WHAT TO



WARNING!

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not

allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.

Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or

allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes

in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immedi-

ately with large quantities of water.

A battery generates hydrogen gas w hich is flam-

mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away

from the vent holes.

Do not use a booster battery or any other booster

source that has a greater than 12 volt system, i.e. D o

not use a 24 volt pow er source.

1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or

bracelets w hich might make an unintended electrical

2. Park the booster vehicle with

out letting the vehicles touch. S

both vehicles, place the automat

the man ual transmission in N eu

OFF.

3. Turn off the h eater, radio, an

cal loads.

4. Connect one end of a jump

terminal of the booster battery.

the sam e cable to the p ositive tebattery.

WARNIN

Do not permit vehicles to to

could establish a ground con

injury could result.




contact

j y

5. Connect the other cable, first

of t he boost er batt er y and t h

vehicle w ith the d ischarged bat

a good contact on the engine.

WARNIN

• Do not connect the cable

the discharge battery. Th

spark could cause the batt

• During cold weather when

low freezing point, electr

battery may freeze. Do not

because the battery could r

battery temperature must

freezing point before attem

WHAT TO



6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the

engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above

sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

WARNING!

Any procedure other than above could result in:

1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirtingout the battery vent;

2. Personal in jury or property damage due to battery

explosion;

3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or

of immobilized vehicle.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLEIf vehicle becomes stuck in sn

often be m oved by a rocking

selector rhythm ically between

(automatic transmissions) and

VERSE (manual transmissions

pressure to the accelerator.

In general, the least am oun t of a

to maintain the rocking motio

wh eels or racing the en gine is m

engine or spinning the w heels,

not freeing the vehicle, may le

heating and failure. Allow the

transmission selector in NEU

minute after every five rocking

minimize overheating and redu

sion failure during prolonged

vehicle




vehicle.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPEDYour vehicle m ay be equipped with emergency tow

hooks.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use

bot h of t he fr ont t ow hooks t o m inim ize t he r i sk of

damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuckvehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury o r

death.

WARNIN

Stand clear of vehicles wh

hooks. Tow straps and chain

serious injury.

CAUTIO

Tow hooks are for emergenc

vehicle stranded off road. Do

tow truck hookup or highw

damage your vehicle.

WHAT TO



TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLEProper towing or lifting equipm ent is required to p revent

damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other

equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-

ment man ufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

the main structural m embers of the vehicle—not to

bump ers or associated brackets. State and local laws

applying to vehicles u nder tow must be observed.

4-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the transfer case while towing,

always use the following method.

The manufacturer recommends

off the grou nd . Acceptable meth

a flatbed or w i th one end of

opposite end on a towing dolly

WINCH USAGE(See p age 289 for more informa




MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

Engine Compartment— 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) . . . . . . . . .385

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .385

Emissions Inspection An d Maintenance

Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387

Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388

▫ Engine Oil 389

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . .

▫ Drive Belts — Check Cond

▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Spark Plug Wires — If Equ

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .

▫ Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . .

▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . .

▫ Emission-Related Compon



▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389

▫ Maintenance Free Battery

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . .398

▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399

▫ Steering Linkage — Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .400

▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403

▫ Hoses And Vacuum/ Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 408

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

▫ Cl t h H d li S t 410

▫ Clutch Linkage . . . . . . . .

▫ Rear Axle And 4X4 Front DLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . .

▫ Front Drive Shaft . . . . . .

▫ Manu al Transmission . . .

▫ Automatic Transmission .

▫ Front Wheel Bearings . . .

▫ Selection Of Lubricating G

▫ Noise Control System Req

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Appearance Care And Prot

Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . .

F (I t t d P M d

382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE



▫ Clutch Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 Fuses (Integrated Power Mod

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430

Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

▫ Headlight (Halogen)/ Front Park And Turn

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

▫ Tail, Stop, Turn And Backup Lights . . . . . . . . .434

▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight With Cargo

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

▫ Cab Top Clearance Lights

▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . .

Fluids And Capacities . . . .

Fluids, Lubricants And Genu

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAINTAI



ENGINE COMPARTMENT— 5.7L




ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)Vehicles equipped with California emissions controls

have a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called

OBDII. This system monitors the performance of the

emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control

systems. When these systems are op erating properly,

your vehicle will provide excellent p erforman ce and fuel

economy, as well as engine emissions well within current

government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will

also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be driveable and not

need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as

possible.

CAUTIO

Prolonged driving with the “

Light” on could cause furthe

sion control s ystem. It could a

and driveability. The vehicle m

any emissions tests can be pe

If the “Malfunction Indicat

severe catalytic converter da

will soon occur. Immediate se

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Messa

If the vehicles d iagnostic system

filler cap in loose, improperly

GASCAP message will be disp

cluster. Tighten the gas cap un

heard. This is an indication tha

MAINTAI



tight d P th d m t

message off. If the problem persists, the message will

appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might

indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice

in a r ow, t he s ys tem w ill t ur n on t he Malfunct ion

Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn

the MIL light off.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCEPROGRAMSIn some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states which have an I/ M (Inspection and

Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the

following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)

is functioning and is not on w hen the engine is running,

and that th e OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready

for testing.

Normally, the OBD system w

system m ay no t be ready if yo

serviced, if you recently had a d

replacement. If the OBD system

not read y for the I/ M test, your

Your vehicle has a simple ig

which you can use prior to goi

check if your vehicle’s OBD sys

the following:

1. Insert your ignition key into

2. Turn the ignition to the ON p

or start the engine.

3. If you crank or start the engi

this test over.

4. As soon as you turn your key

will see your MIL symbol com




b lb h k

5. App roximately 15 seconds later, one of two th ings will

happen:

a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec-

ond s and then remain on un til the first engine crank or

the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s

OBD system is not ready and you should no t proceed

to the I/ M station.

b. The MILlight will remain fully illum inated u ntil the

first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means

that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you canproceed to the I/ M station.

If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your

dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently

serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may

need to d o nothing more than drive your vehicle as you

normally wou ld in order for your OBD system to upd ate.

A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate

Regardless of w hether your v

ready or not ready, if the MI

du ring normal vehicle operatio

vehicle serviced before going to

station can fail you r vehicle beca

with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTSU se of genuine Mopar part

maintenance and repairs is hig

sure the designed performancaused by the use of non-Mopa

and repairs will not be covere

warranty.

MAINTAI



th t th t i d

DEALER SERVICEYour dealer h as th e q ualified service p ersonnel, special

tools and equipment to perform all service operations in

an expert manner. Service manuals are available which

include detailed service information for your vehicle.

Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure

yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

WARNIN

You can be badly injured w

motor vehicle. D o only that s

you have the knowledge and

If you have any doubt about y

a service job, take your ve

mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURThe pages that follow contain t

services determined by the engi

vehicle.

Besides the maintenance items

maintenance intervals, there ar

operate satisfactorily without

However, if a malfunction of th




could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.

These items should be inspected if a malfunction is

observed or suspected.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the

engine oil m ust be m aintained at the correct level. The

best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 m inutes

after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before

starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking the oil wh ile the v ehicle is on level ground will

improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain

the oil level between the ADD and SAFE markings on the

dipstick. Adding one qu art of oil when the reading is at

the ADD mark will result in a SAFE reading on these

engines.

CAUTIO

Overfilling or underfilling th

oil aeration or loss of oil pres

age your engine.

MAINTAI



Change Engine Oil

Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the

interval at which your oil should be changed. Check thefollowing to d etermine if any apply to you:

• Day or n ight tem peratures are below 32°F (0°C).

• Stop and go driving.

• Extensive engine idling.

• Driving in dusty conditions

• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)

• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high

speeds during hot weather, above 32°C (90°F)

• Trailer towing

• Heavy Loading

• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service)

• Off-road or desert operation

•

If equipped for and operatfuel.

NOTE: If AN Y of these apply

engine oil every 3,000 m iles (

whichever comes first and foll

Maintenance Schedules sectio

If none of these app ly to you, the

at every interval shown on sche

nance Schedules section of thi

NOTE: Under no circumstanc

tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10

wh ichever comes first.

Dusty Conditions

Driving th rough du st-laden air

keeping abrasive materials out o




di i i l i

engine air cleaner, the crankcase inlet air cleaner an d the

crankcase ventilation system. Make sure that these units

are clean at all t imes. This will tend to reduce to aminimu m the am oun t of abrasive material that may enter

the engine.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of operating conditions, the manufacture only

recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet

the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard

MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the

specification MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol

There is a symbol to aid you in selecting the p roper

engine oil.

This sym

been cer

Petroleummanufac

API Cert

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Gr

For trucks with a 5.7L engine

combined weight rating of 14,

5W-30 engine oil is recomme

temperatures. For all other tru

operating under a gross weigh

lbs. SAE 5W-20 engine oil i

operating temperatures. This

temperature starting and vehi

engine oil filler cap also sh

MAINTAI



i il i it f

For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the

Engine Compartment illustration in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synth etic engine oils provid ed the recom-

mend ed oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-

mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes

are followed .Materials Added to Engine Oil

The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-

tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to

the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and

it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-

ditives.

Disposing of Used Engine Oi

Care should be taken in disposi

oil filters from your vehicle. indiscriminately discarded, can

environment. Contact your de

governmental agency for advice

oil and oil filters can be safely

Engine Oil FilterThe engine oil filter should be

oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

The manu facturer’s engines h

filter. Use a filter of this typ e for

of replacement filters varies

quality filters should be used

service. Mopar Engine Oil Filt

filter and are recommended.




Drive Belts — Check Condition and TensionBelt tension is controlled by means of an automatic

tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be

inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re-

quired. See your authorized dealer for service.

At the m ileage indicated in the m aintenance schedu le, all

belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.

Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.

Belts shou ld be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication

of damage which could result in belt failure. Low gen-

erator belt tension can cause battery failure.

Also check belt routing to make sure there is n o interfer-

ence between the belts and other engine components.

Spark PlugsSpark plugs m ust fire p roperly

mance and emission control. Nstalled at the specified mileage

replaced if there is any m alfun c

plug, malfunctioning spark plu

lytic converter. For proper typ

plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Em

tion” label in the engine compa

Spark Plug Wires — IF Equi

The spark plug wires should beconnected. Terminals should b

damaged, or faulty wires shoul

Engine Air Cleaner FilterUnd er norm al driving condition

the intervals shown on Schedu

MAINTAI



drive the vehicle frequently u nder du sty or severe con-

ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi-

cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown onSchedule “B”.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can

provide a measure of protection i n the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessaryfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Engine Fuel FilterA plugged fuel filter can cause s

which a vehicle can be d rivenShould an excessive amount o

fuel tank, frequent filter replace

Catalytic ConverterThe catalytic converter requires

only. Leaded gasoline w ill destro

catalyst as an emission control

Under normal operating condverter will not require mainten

por tant t o keep t he engine p

proper catalyst op eration and

damage.




CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In

the event of engine malfunction, particularly i nvolv-

ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-

mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-

u ed operati on of your veh icl e wi th a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and the

vehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

WARNIN

A hot exhaust system can starmaterials that can burn. Su

grass or leaves coming into

haust system. D o n ot park o r

areas where your exhaust sy

thing that can burn.

In unusual situations involving

engine operation, a scorching oand abnormal catalyst overhea

vehicle should be stopped, the

vehicle allowed to cool. Therea

tune-up to manufacturer’s spec

tained immed iately.

MAINTAI



To minimize the possibility of catalyst d amage:

•

Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignitionwhen the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

• D o not i dl e t he engi ne w i t h any s par k pl ug w i r es

disconnected or removed, such as w hen diagnostic

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough

idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Emission-Related Compone

Positive Crankcase (PCV) VaProper operation of the crank

requires that the PCV valve be

ging from d eposits. Deposits ca

valve and passages with incre

PCV valve, hoses, and passa

operation at the intervals sp

plugged or sticking, replace wi

attempt to clean the old PCV

tion hoses for indications of daging with deposits. Replace if n

Maintenance Free BatteryThe top of the maintenance fre

sealed. You will never have to a

maintenance required.




WARNING!

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and canburn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to

contact your eyes, sk in or clothing. D on’t lean over a

battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in

eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with

large amounts of water.

Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame

or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster

battery or any other booster source with an outputgreater than 12 volts. D on’t allow cable clamps to

touch each other.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-

tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

CAUTIO

It is essential when replaci

battery that the positive ca

positive post and the negative

negative post. Battery posts a

and negative (-) and identifie

Also, if a “fast charger” is u

vehicle, disconnect both veh

fore connecting the charger t

“fast charger” to provide star

Air Conditioner MaintenanceFor best possible performanc

should be checked an d serviced

at the start of each warm sea

includ e cleaning of the condense

test. Drive belt tension should

MAINTAI



WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricantsapproved by the m anufacturer for yo ur air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or l ubricants can cause

the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrige rantor any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced repairman.

Refrigerant Recovery and Re

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrig

bon (HFC) that is endorsed bytection Agency and is an ozon

ever, the man ufacturer recomm e

service be performed by dealers

using recovery and recycling eq

NOTE: Use only manufacture

Sealers, Stop Leak Prod ucts, Sea

sor Oil, or Refrigerants.

Power Steering — Fluid CheChecking the power steering

service interval is not required.

checked if a leak is suspecte

apparent, and/ or the system is

pated. Coordinate inspection ef

DaimlerChrysler Dealership.




WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface andwith the engine off to prevent injury from moving

parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do

not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended

power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all

surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Partsfor correct fluid type.

Front Suspension Ball Joints

NOTE: When anticipating any severe offroad or hill

climbing maneuvers, the power steering fluid level may

be increased to the FULL HOT level (with a cold system).

In this w ay, the power steering system will continue to

provide assist as the inclinati

increases, i.e. when the vehicle

NOTE: When anticipating any

wet conditions, ensure that th

properly greased before ans s

taken through such conditions

pur ge contam inants and w ate

Regular greasing will prolong t

The ball joints and seals shoul

the vehicle is serviced for otherThe ball joints originally supp

permanently lubricated at the fa

service. However, if the seals

damaged, the joints should b

replacement ball joints are avai

MAINTAI



Front su spension ball joints should be replaced only by a

qualified service technician using tools specially de-

signed for this purpose. Damage to the joints and/ orsuspension components may result if improper replace-

ment procedures are used.

If seals are d amaged the ball joints should be replaced to

prevent leakage or contamination of the grease.

Steering Linkage — InspectionWhenever the vehicle is h oisted, all steering linkage

joints should be inspected for evidence of damage. If seals are damaged, parts should be replaced to prevent

leakage or contamination of the grease. Lubricate the

steering linkage regu larly according to the “Maintenance

Schedule” in this manual.

Front Prop Shaft LubricationLubricate the front driveshaft g

change listed in the appropriatfor your vehicle (Schedule “A

type MS-6560 (lithium based gr

Front Driveshaft G




Body LubricationLocks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, doors, tailgate and hood hinges, should belubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation

and to p rotect against rust and wear. Prior to the app li-

cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be

wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating

excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular

attention should also be given to hood latching compo-

nents to insure proper function. When performing other

underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism

and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, p referably in the fall and spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock

Cylind er Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper BladesThe rubber edges of the wiper b

should be cleaned periodically wand a mild nonabrasive cleaner

mulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dr

may cause deterioration of the w

washer fluid wh en using the w i

from a dry windshield.

Avoid u sing the w iper blades to

the w indshield. Keep the blade r

petroleum products such as eng

Windshield WashersThe fluid reservoir is located un

be checked for fluid level at r

reservoir with windshield wash

diator antifreeze).

MAINTAI



To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. Thisrating information can be found on most washer fluid

containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working aroundthe w asher solution.

After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a

few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or

freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All

Weather Windshield Washer Solution, used with water as

directed on the container, aids

the freezing p oint to avoid li

harmful to paint or trim.

Exhaust SystemThe best protection against car

the vehicle body is a p roperly m

system.

Whenever a change is noticed in

system, wh en exhaust fumes ca

vehicle, or when the underside

damaged, have a competent me

plete exhaust system and adjace

damaged, deteriorated, or mi

seams or loose connections cou

to seep into the passenger co

inspect the exhaust system each

for lubrication or oil change. Re




WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill . They con tain carbonmonoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-

low the preceding safety tips.

Exhaust System Rubber Isolator and Loop-Type

Hanger — If Equipped

Inspect surfaces whenever the vehicle is hoisted forrubber to metal separation or deep cracks. SLIGHT

CRACKING DUE TO WEATHERING DOES NOT AD-

VERSELY AFFECT PERFORMAN CE. If, ho w ever, exces-

sively deep localized cracks are present, or any part of the

exhaust system abnorm ally contacts the und erbody hard -

ware, the isolator and / or h anger should be replaced.

Cooling System

WARNIN

You or others can be badly bu

steam from your radiator. If

coming from under the hood

until the radiator has had tim

open a cooling system pressu

tor is hot.

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifr

months (before the onset of

app licable). If coolant is d irty or

system should be drained , flush

coolant. Check the front of the

MAINTAI



accumu lation of bu gs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gen tly

spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the

face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-

ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection

at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for

leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but

not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for

proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of

coolant from the rad iator drain cock. If the cap is sealing

properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to

drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-

MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WH EN THE

COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System — Drain, Flu

At the intervals shown on the

the system should be drained, f

If the solution is dirty or contain

of sediment, clean and flush

system cleaner. Follow with a th

all deposits and chemicals. P

antifreeze solution.

Selection Of Coolant

Use only the manufacturers rec

to Fluids, Lubricants and Ge

coolant type.




CAUTION!

Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may

decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-

ant is introduced into the cooling system in an

emergency, it should be replaced with the specified

coolant as soon as possible.

Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust i nhibitors or antirust products, as they may notbe compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

This vehicle has not been designed for use with

Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene

Glycol based coolants is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle h as been built w

coolant that allows extend ed macoolant can be used up to 5 Year

replacement. To prevent reduci

nance period, i t is im por tant

coolant throughout the life of yo

these recommendations for usin

tive Technology (HOAT) coolan

When adding coolant, a minim

omm ended Mopar Antifreeze/ Mile Formu la H OAT (Hybrid O

ogy), or equivalent, in water sh

concentrations (not to exceed 70

34°F (37°C ) are anticipated

Use only high pu rity water such

water when mixing the water/

MAINTAI



The use of lower qu ality water w ill reduce the amou nt of

corrosion p rotection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-

tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-

cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where

the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the

engine coolant and will require m ore frequent coolant

changes.

Cooling System Pressure CapThe cap m us t be fully t ightened t o pr event loss of

coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the

radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accum ulation of foreign material on the sealing su rfaces.

WARNIN

• The warning words “DO the cooling system pressur

caution. Never add coolan

overheated. Do not loosen

cool an overheated engine

to build up in the coolin

scalding or injury, do not r

while the system is hot or

•

Do not use a pressure caspecified for your vehicl

engine damage may result

Disposal of Used Engine Coo

Used ethylene glycol based eng

substance requiring p roper d is

local authorities to determine th




do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in op en

containers or allow it t o r em ain in puddl es on t he

ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physicianimmediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for

determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the

engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant

recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated

on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for

coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your

service attend ant of this. As long as the engine operating

temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only

be checked once a month.

When addit ional coolant is n

proper level, it should be added

not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is sto

few kilometers) of operation,

coming from the front of the eng

normally a result of moisture f

humidity accumulating on the r

ized when the thermostat opens

enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engin

evidence of radiator or hose le

safely driven. The vapor will so

• Do not overfill the coolant re

MAINTAI



• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the

coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be

add ed, contents of coolant recovery bottle mu st also beprotected against freezing.

• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the

level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when

the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-

sure tested for leaks.

• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine

coolant (minimum) and distil led water for proper

corrosion protection of your engine which contains

aluminum comp onents.

• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery

bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean, also.

• Do not change the thermost

operation. If replacement i

ONLY the correct typ e thermresult in u nsatisfactory coola

mileage, and increased em is

Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor HInspect surfaces of hoses and n

of heat and mechanical d ama

brittle rubber, cracking, tears, c

sive swelling indicate deteriora

Pay particular attention to tho

heat sources such as the exhaus

routing to be sure hoses do not

heat source or moving compone

damage or mechanical wear.

Insure nylon tubing in these

collapsed.




WARNING!

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result inspilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the

brake fluid catching fire.

Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed

container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or

moisture.

CAUTION!

Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.

Brake Hoses

Inspection should be perform

system is serviced or at intervadraulic brake hoses for surface c

spots. If there is any evidence

worn spots, the hose should b

Eventual deterioration of the h

possible burst failure.

Clutch Hydraulic System

The clutch hydraulic system is a

system. In the event of leakage

system must be replaced.

Clutch LinkageIf the clutch pedal linkage begin

clutch pedal pivot bushings sho

to Fluids, Lubricants and Genu

lubricant type.




Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid LevelRefer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the

correct Fluid ty pe. For norm al service, periodic fluid levelchecks are not requ ired. W hen the v ehicle is serviced for

other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly

should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected

inspect the fluid level.

This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level

position. The fluid level should be even with the bottom

of the fill hole for the Manufacturer’s C205F HD Front

Axles. The fluid level should b e 5/ 8” (16 mm ) below on9 1/ 4” Manufacturer’s Rear Axles.

For all 2500 Model axles, the fluid level should be 1/ 4” ±

1/ 4” (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the 9.25”

Front and 3/ 4”± 1/ 4” (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on 10.5” Rear

axles.

Drain and Refill

Vehicles operated in normal serv

scheduled oil changes. If fluid hwith water or to provide the corr

and refill.

Lubricant Selection

Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and

fluid type.

NOTE: The presence of water

result in corrosion and possib

componen ts. Operation of the v

encountered in some off-highw

require draining and refilling th

Limited-Slip Di fferentials

Power Wagon Axles DO NOT R

oil additive (friction modifiers)

MAINTAI



Transfer Case

Fluid Level Check

This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler

plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the

filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.

Lubricant Selection

Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct

fluid type.

Front Drive Shaft

The front drive shaft contains a grease fitting whichshould be serviced at every oil change (see maintenance

schedule A/ B).

Manual Transmission

Fluid Level Check

This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler

plug. If the level of the lubricant is more than 1/ 4” (6.4

mm) below the bottom of the filler hole while the vehicle

is on level ground, enough lubr

bring the level to the bottom of

Lubricant Selection G56 (6 –Transmission — If Equipped

This transmission does not requ

it becomes necessary to add or

transmission, refer to Fluids,

Parts for correct fluid type.


Fluid Level CheckThe fluid level should be chec

fully warmed up and the fluid

normal operating temperature.

mission with an improper fluid

the life of the transmission and

fluid level whenever the vehicl




Fluid Level Check – 545RFE

Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal

operating temperature 82°C (180°F). This occurs after atleast 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating

temperature the fluid cannot be h eld comfortably be-

tween the fingertips.

To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,

the following procedure must be u sed:

1. Operate the engine at idle speed and n ormal operating

temperature.

2. The vehicle must be on level ground.

3. Fully apply the p arking brake and press the brake

pedal.

4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear

position ending with the lever in P (Park).

5. Remove th e dipstick, wipe it

seated.

6. Remove the dipstick again anboth sides. The fluid level shoul

(upper) reference holes on the d

ing temperature. Verify that soli

both sides of the dipstick. If

required into the dipstick tube

adding any quantity of oil throu

a minimum of two (2) minutes

into the transmission before rec

NOTE: If it is necessary to chec

the operating temperature, th

between the two “COLD” (low

with the fluid at approximately

perature). If the fluid level is

room temperature, i t should

MAINTAI



(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches

180°F (82°C). Remem ber it is best to check the level at th e

normal operating temperature.

CAUTION!

Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F

(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add

fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to

produce an accurate reading.

7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.

To p revent dirt and water from entering th e transmission

after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the

dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the

dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated

position, as long as i ts seal remains engaged in the

dipstick tube.

Selection Of Lubricant

Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and

fluid type. It is important that maintained at the prescribed

mended fluid.

CAUTIO

Using a transmission fluid ot

turers recommended fluid m

in transmission shift quality ashudder. Using a transmissio

manufacturers recommended

more frequent fluid and fi

Fluids, Lubricants and Gen

fluid type.




Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change

To obtain best performance and long life for automatic

transmissions, the manufacturer recommends that theybe given regular maintenance service by an Authorized

Dodge Dealer or Service Center.

It is im por tant t hat pr oper lubr icant is us ed in t he

transmission. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine

Parts for correct fluid type.

The fluid and filter(s) should be changed as specified in

the Maintenance Schedule (Section 8).

NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any

reason, the fluid and filter(s) should be changed.

Special Additives

The manu facturer strongly recommends against the ad-

dition of any additives to the transmission. Exception to

this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting

fluid leaks. The u se of transm

avoided, since they may advers

Front Wheel BearingsFront wheel bearings for all

sealed-for-life. They do not r

replacement. In some instanc

“purge” excess grease and the b

wet. This is normal. Periodic ins

recommended.

Rear Wheel Bearings — Man

These bearings are normally lubricated. Cleaning and repa

wh en axle shafts are removed or

or dust contamination.

MAINTAI



Selection of Lubricating GreaseThe National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) has

developed a symbol (Certification Mark) to aid thevehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for the

lubrication of w heel bearings and chassis components.

This symbol (an example is shown below) is located on

the grease container and identifies the application and

quality of the grease.

Th ere are tw o g rou p s

identified, those for wheel

bearings (Letter “G”) andthose for chassis (Letter

“L”) lubrication. Perfor-

mance categories within

these groups result in dual

lett er designat ions for

each group . The letter des-

ignations shown in the ex-

a mp le a re t he h ig hest

quality level available and w hen

be used for both wheel bearing

Use only those greases that havecontainer along with the prope

application.

Noise Control System RequWarrantyAll vehicles built over 10,000 lbs

Weight Rating and manufacture

United States are required to c

Govern men t’s Exterior N oise Re




can be identified by the Noise Emission Control Label

located in the operator’s compartment.

Required Maintenance for N

The following maintenance ser

every 6 months or 6,000 milescomes first, to assure proper

control systems. In addition,

should be performed anytime a

or suspected. Proper maintena

will help the effectiveness of th

Air Cleaner Assembly

Inspect air cleaner housing for

Make certain that the air cleaneand the cover is t ight. Check

cleaner for tightness. The gaske

housing and throttle body mu

condition. The engine air cleane

and serviced according to the in

appropriate maintenance sched

MAINTAI



Tampering with Noise Control System Prohibited

Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing

thereof: (1) the removal or rendering inoperative by anyperson, other than for pu rposes of maintenance, repair, or

replacement, of any d evice or element of d esign incorpo-

rated into any new vehicle for the p urpose of noise

contr ol pr ior t o it s s ale or deliver y t o t he ult im ate

purchaser or while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle

after such device or element of design has been removed

or rendered inoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering arethe acts listed below.

AIR CLEANER

• Removal of the air cleaner.

• Inverting the air cleaner lid.

• Removal of the air ducting.

EXHAU ST SYSTEM

• Removal or rendering inop

components including the mu

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

• Removal or rendering inoper

• Removal of the fan shroud.

Noise Emission Warranty

The manufacturer warrants that

tured by the manufacturer, wequipp ed to conform at the time

control with all applicable U.S.

lations.

This warranty covers this vehic

equipped by the manufacturer,

particular part, component or

manu factured by the manu fac




assembly or in any part, component or system of the

vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at

the time it left the manufacturers control, caused noise

emissions to exceed Federal st

this warranty for the life of the

Noise Systems Maintenan ce Chart an d Service Log Insert Mon th, Day, Year u nd er column mileage at which service was performed.

MILES 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000

KILOMETERS 9 600 19 000 29 000 36 000 48 000 58 000

Exhaust system-inspect

Air cleaner

assembly-inspectODOMETERREADING

PERFORMED BY

PERFORMED AT

MAINTAI



Noise Systems Maintenan ce Chart an d Service Log Insert Mon th, Day, Year u nd er column mileage at which service was performed.

MILES 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 KILOMETERS 87 000 96 000 106 000 116 000 126 000 135 000

Exhaust system-inspect

Air cleanerassembly-inspect

ODOMETERREADING

PERFORMED BYPERFORMED AT

Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion

Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly

corrosive to the metal in your v

which exposes your vehicle to

road surfaces on which the veh

hot or cold weather and other

have an adverse effect on pain

body protection.




The following m aintenance recomm endations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of d eterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmosph eric fallout/ ind ustrial p ollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly

hicle in the shade using Mopcar wash soap, and rinse the

clear water.

• If insects, tar or other simila

lated on your vehicle, use M

and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to

and to protect your paint finscratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compo

t hat m ay di m inis h t he gl os

finish.

MAINTAI



CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materialssuch as steel wool or scouring powder, which will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near th e ocean, hose off the u nd ercarriage at least once

a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels and tru nk be kep t clear and

open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is dam aged

similar cause which destroys

coating, have your vehicle r

sible. The cost of such repairs

sibility of the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such

de-icer salt, etc., be sure tha

packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done o

mud or stone shields behind

• Use Mopar touch up paint

possible. Your dealer has tou

color of your vehicle.

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, e

chrome plated w heels shou ld be

mild soap and water to preve




heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a non-

abrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads,

steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mo-

par cleaners are recommend ed. Do n ot use oven cleaner.

Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or

harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective

finish.

YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If

equipped

YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following

manner:• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild

soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.

Use a fresh, dam p towel to remove soap residu e.

• For greas e s tains , apply

cleaner to a clean, dam p cloth

fresh, damp towel to remove

• Do n ot u se any solvents or p

tials products.

Interior Care

Use Mopar Total Clean to cle

carpeting.

Use Mopar Total Clean to clea

Mopar Total Clean is specifleather up holstery.

Your leather u pholstery can be b

cleaning with a damp soft cloth

can act as an abrasive and dama

and should be removed promp

Stubborn soils can be removed

and Mopar Total Clean. Care

MAINTAI



soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please

do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, d eter-

gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather

uph olstery. App lication of a leather conditioner is n ot

required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

w it h M op a r G la ss Clea n er o r a n y co m me rcia l

household-type glass cleaner. Never u se an abrasive typ e

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-

dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear

quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do

not use scrapers or other sharp

scratch the elements. When clea

spray cleaner on the towel or ra

not spray cleaner directly on th

Cleaning Plastic Instrument

The lenses in front of the instru

molded in clear plastic. When

must be taken to avoid scratchi

1. Clean with a w et soft rag. A m

used, but do not use high alco

cleaners. If soap is used, w ipe rag.

2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean

solvents or abrasive cleaners. Th

Sun damage can also weaken th




If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or

lukewarm water. Do not remov e the belts from the car to

wash them.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

Dry with a soft tissue.

FUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE)An integrated Power Modu le is located in the engine

compartment near the battery. This center contains car-

tridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuseand component may be stamped on the inside cover

otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on

the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.

Integrated Power Mo

MAINTAI



Cavity CartridgeFuse

MiniFuse

Description

1 20 Am pYellow

Power Outlet Console

2 20 Am pYellow

Cabin CompartmentNode (CCN) DoorLocks/ Brake Trans-mission Shift Inter-lock (BTSI)

3 20 Am pYellow

Spare

4 15 Am pBlue

Spare

5 20 Am pYellow

Power Sunroof

6 10 Am pRed

VIST Fan/ Wastegate


MiniFuse

7 15 Am pBlue

8 10 Am pRed

9 30 Am pPink

10 5 Am pOrange





MiniFuse

Description

11 20 Am pYellow Ignition Off Draw(IOD)-Cabin Com-partment N ode(CCN)/ Radio/ Und erHood Lamp/ WirelessControl Module(WCM)/ Satellite Digi-tal Audio Receiver(SDARS)/ Hands Free

Module (HFM)12 30 Am p

Pink Electric Brake

13 25 Am pNatural

Power-BatteryRWAL/ ABS ModuleFeed

14 15 Am pBlue

Park Lamps Left


MiniFuse

15 20 Am pYellow

16 15 Am pBlue

17 15 Am pBlue

18 40 Am pGreen

19 30 Am pPink

20 10 Am pRed

21 10 Am pRed

22 2 Am pGray

MAINTAI




MiniFuse

Description

23 10 Am pRed Engine Control Mod-ule (ECM)/ WirelessControl Module(WCM)/ HVC

24 20 Am pBlue

Subwoofer Amplifier(SRT-10 Only)

25 10 Am pRed

Power Mirror

26 20 Am p

Yellow

Brake Switch/ Center

High Moun t StopLamp (CHMSL)

27 40 Am pGreen

Power Seats

28 10 Am pRed

Power Run/ Start-NCC/ Wireless Con-trol Modu le (WCM)/ ABS/ RWAL


MiniFuse

29 10 Am pRed

30 15 Am pBlue

31 10 Am pRed

32 10 Am pRed

33 10 Am pRed

34 10 Am pRed

35 15 Am pBlue





MiniFuse

Description

36 25 Am pNatural Audio_Amplifier

37 15 Am pBlue

Spare

38 20 Am pYellow

Power Outlet IP

39 10 Am pRed

Sunroof/ Seatbelt Ten-sioner

40 20 Am pYellow

Cigar Lighter

41 25 Am pNatural

Spare

42 30 Am pPink

Diesel PCM (DieselOnly)

CAUTIO

•

When installing the Intecover, it is important to en

erly positioned and fully la

may allow water to get int

Module, and possibly resu

failure.

• When replacing a blown f

use only a fuse having

rating. The use of a fuse w

indicated may result in

system overload. If a prop

ues to blow, it indicates a

that must be corrected.

MAINTAI



VEHICLE STORAGEIf you are storing you r vehicle for more than 21 days, we

recommend that you take the following steps to mini-

mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:

• Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse

located in the Integrated Pow er Mod ule, located in the

engine compartment. The I.O.D. cavity includes a

snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be discon-

nected, without removing it from the fuse block.

• The electronic shift transfer case should be placed in

the 4HI mode an d k ept in this position to m inimize thebattery drain.

• As an alternative to the above steps you may, discon-

nect the negative cables from both batteries.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

in the fresh air and high b

insure adequate system lub

possibility of compressor da

started again.

NOTE: When reinstalling the I

fully seated, the gages in the In

a full sweep, w hen th e ignition k

is a normal condition.

REPLACEMENT LIGHT BUL

LIGHT BULBS — Inside

Overhead Console Lights . . . .

Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All of the inside bulbs are bra

Aluminum base bulbs are not a




LIGHT BULBS — Outside Bulb N o.

Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057

Center H igh Mounted Stop Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . 912

Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006LL

Headlamp (Halogen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H 13

Side Marker, Park & Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . 3157NAK

Rear License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Rear Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912

Tail & Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057

BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Lights

CAUTION!

This is a halogen bulb. Avoid touching the glass

with your fingers. Reduced bulb life will result.

1. Open the hood

2. Remove the two (2) bolts fro

light housing.

Front Headlight H

MAINTAI



3. Rem ove t he plug fr om t he inner fender w ell and

remove the nu t through the access hole.

4. Pull the housing out from the

disconnect the electrical connec

NOTE: For easier removal, pu

straight forward, app lying th e g

the outer edge of the headlight

Inner Fender Plug

Rear Headlight Hous




5. Unlock and pull connector s

the headlight halogen bulb.

6. Twist connector on the side m

light bulb 1 ⁄ 4 turn and remove c

housing.

Headlight Removal Bulb Remo

MAINTAI



7. Remove housing from vehicle with headlight halogen

bulb in hou sing.

8. Twist the headlight halogen bulb1

⁄ 4 turn and removeheadlight bulb from the housing.

9. Replace headlight or side marker/ turn signal/ park

light bulb. Do not touch the headlight halogen bulb.

10. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-

ing.

Tail, Stop, Turn and Backup

1. Remove the two (2) screws t

sheetmetal.

Removing the Two




2. Pull the housing straight out from the body, with a

quick motion, to separate the housing from the body. If

not p ulled straight, locators may be d amaged.

3. Rotate the bulb socket coun

from the hou sing.

Pulling Housing From Body

Rotating Bulb Socket

MAINTAI



4. Pu ll bu lb straigh t ou t of socket. 5. Rev erse Proced u re to in stall

the two raised blocks passed th

Pulling Bulb From Socket

Sliding Raised Bloc




Center High-Mounted Stoplight With Cargo Light

1. Remove the two (2) screws holding the housing/ lens

to the body as shown.

2. Separate the connector hold

ing harness to the body.

3. Turn desired bulb socket 1 ⁄ 4

and bulb from housing.

MAINTAI



4. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.

• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps

• Inside Bulb: Center High Mount Stop Lamp

5. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-

ing.

Cab Top Clearance Lights —

1. Remove the two screws from




2. Rotate the socket 1 ⁄ 4 turn and pull i t from the light

assembly.

3. Pull the bulb straight from it

MAINTAI



Fog Lights

1. Reach under the vehicle, unlock and twist connector

counterclockwise1

⁄ 4

turn and remove connector and bulbfrom housing.

2. Pull bulb straight from the connector.

3. Reverse procedure for instal

ing.




FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S.

Fuel5.7L, 89 Octane

2500 Shortbed Mod els 34 gal.

2500 Longbed Mod els 35 gal.

Engine Oil (with filter)

5.7L Engine V-8 (SAE 5W-20, API Certified). For trucksoperating und er a gross combined weight rating less

than 14,000 lbs.

7.0 qts.

5.7L Engine V-8 (SAE 5W-30, API Certified). For trucksoperating und er a gross combined weight rating

greater than 14,000 lbs.7.0 qts.

Cooling System

5.7L (Mopa r Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 MileFormula)

18.7 qts.

MAINTAI



FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Com ponent Flu id s, Lubricants and Genu ine PartsEngine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile Form

ganic Additive Technology) P/ N 5011764AB or equiva

Engine Oil (For trucks operatingund er a gross combined weightrating less than 14,000 lbs.)

Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material stand

5.7L Engine Oil (For trucks operat-ing un der a gross combinedweight rating greater than 14,000

lbs.)

Use SAE 5W-30, API Certified, meeting material stand

Engine Oil Filter Mopar Engine Oil Filter, P/ N 5281090 or equivalent.

Sp ar k P lu gs Refer to th e Veh icle Em issio n Co ntro l In for ma tio n la bpartment.

Fuel Selection (5.7L) 89 Octane Mid-Grade, (R+M)/ 2 Method Preferred (87




Chassis

Com ponent Fluid s, Lu bricants and Genu ine Parts.

Autom atic Transm ission Mop ar

ATF+4, Automatic Transmission FluidTransfer Case Mop ar ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission Fluid (G-56) Mopar ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid

Fr ont D rives haft G reas e Fit ting. U se Mopar type MS-6560 (lithium based grease), o

Clu tch Linkage Mu ltip urp ose Grease, N LGI Grad e 2 E.P.

Fr ont and Rear A xle Synthetic, G L-5 SA E, 75W-90. Lim i ted-Slip 10.5 inchREQUIRE a limited slip additive.

Brake Master Cylind er Mop ar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If D

available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recomPow er Steering Reservoir Mop ar ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid

MAINTAI



MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 446

Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . .

▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . .



EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCEThe “Schedu led” maintenance services, listed in bold

type in this section (Section 8) must be d one at the times

or mileages specified to assure the continued properfunctioning of the emission control system. These, and all

other maintenance services included in this manual,

should be done to provide best vehicle performance and

reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for

vehicles in severe op erating conditions such as du sty

areas and very short trip d riving.

Inspection and service also should be done any time a

malfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the em is-

sion control devices and systems on you r vehicle may be

performed by any automotive repair establishment or

individual using any automotive part which has been

certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-

nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULESThere are two maintenance s

required service for your vehic

First is Schedule “B”. It is for v

under the conditions that are

beginning of the schedule.

• Day or night temperatures ar

• Stop and go d riving.


• Driving in dusty conditions.

• Short trips of less than 10 mi

• More than 50% of your driv

speeds during hot weather, a

• Trailer towing.

• Snowplowing.

446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

8

M

A

I

N

T

E

NA

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

L

E

S



• Heavy Loading.

• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).

• Off-road or desert operation.

• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)

fuel.

NOTE: If AN Y of these apply to you then change your

engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,

whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the

Maintenance Schedules section of this manual.

NOTE: If AN Y of these apply to you then flush andreplace your engine coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000

km) or 60 months, wh ichever comes first an d follow

schedule “B” of the Maintenance Schedules section of

this manual.

NOTE: Most vehicles are operated un der the conditions

listed for Schedule B.

Second is Schedu le “A”. It is

operated under any of the condi

u le B.

Use the schedule that best desc

tions. Where time and mileag

interval that occurs first.

NOTE: Under no circumstanc

tervals exceed 6000 miles (10

wh ichever comes first.

CAUTIO

Failure to perform the requi

may result in damage to the

MAINT



At Each Stop for Fuel

• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully

warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while

the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-

racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the

level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• C heck t he w i nds hield w asher s olvent and add if

required.

Once a Month

• Check tire p ressure and look for u nusual wear or

damage.

• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals

as required.

• Check the fluid levels of coolant bottle, brake master

cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.

• Check all lights an d all other e

operation.

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.

• Lubricate the front driveshaft

end links.

• Inspect the exhaust system.

• Inspect the brake hoses.

• Inspect the U—joints and f

nents.

• Check the automatic transmi

• Check the manual transmissi

• Check the coolant level, hose

• Lubricate Front Drive Shaft F

448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

8

M

A

I

N

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

LE

S



Schedule “B”Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle

under one or more of the following conditions.

• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).

• Stop and go driving.


• Driving in dusty conditions.

• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).

• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high

speeds during hot weather, above 90° F C (32°).

• Trailer towing.

• Snowplowing.

• Heavy Loading.

• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).

• Off-road or desert operation.

• If equipped for and operat

fuel.

NOTE: If AN Y of these apply

engine oil every 3,000 m iles (

whichever comes first and foll

Maintenance Schedules sectio

NOTE: If AN Y of these appl

replace your engine coolant ever

km) or 60 months, whichever

schedule “B” of the Maintenanthis manual.

If none of these app ly to you, the

at every interval shown on sche

nance Schedules section of thi



Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000

(Kilometers) (5 000) (10 000) (14 000)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3months, whichever comes first. X X X

Lu bricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting. X X X

Rotate tires. X

Check spare tire for proper pressure and correctstowage.

X

Lu bricate tie rod end links. X X X

Change rear axle flu id .

Change front axle fluid . Inspect brake linings.

Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-sary.

450 SCHEDULE “B”

8

M

A

I

N

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

LE

S



Miles 18,000 21,000 24,000

(Kilometers) (29 000) (34 000) (39 000)



Rotate tires. X X


X X



Change front axle fluid . Check transfer case flu id level.

Inspect brake linings. X


Replace spark plugs.

Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**



Miles 33,000 36,000 39,000

(Kilometers) (53 000) (58 000) (63 000)



Rotate tires. X


X



Change front axle fluid .




8

M

A

I

N

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

LE

S



Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000

(Kilometers) (77 000) (82 000) (87 000)



Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or102, 000 miles (170 000 km) whichever comes first.

Rotate tires. X X


X X


Drain and refill transfer case flu id .



Change 6-sp d m anu al transm ission (G-56) flu id .





Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000

(Kilometers) (77 000) (82 000) (87 000)



Drain and refill automatic tranmission fluid andchange main sump filter (545RFE only).


8

M

A

I

N

T

E

N

A

N

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

LE

S



Miles 63,000 66,000 69,000

(Kilometers) (101 000) (106 000) (111 000)



Rotate tires. X


X


Inspect engin e air cleaner filter.



Inspect brake linings.

Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-quired.



Miles 78,000 81,000 84,000

(Kilometers) (126 000) (130 000) (135 000)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3

months, whichever comes first. X X X


Rotate tires. X X

Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stow-age.

X X




Check transfer case flu id level.


Inspect engin e air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.



Inspect au to tension d rive belt and replace if required .


8

M

A

I

N

T

E

N

AN

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

LE

S



Miles 93,000 96,000

(Kilometers) (150 000) (154 000)

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months,

wh ichever comes first. X X

Lu bricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting. X X

Rotate tires. X

Check spare tire for p rop er p ressu re and correct stow age. X

Lu bricate tie rod end links. X X

Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60months.




Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,00

(Kilometers) (169 000) (174 000) (179 000) (183 00

Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3

months, whichever comes first. X X X X

Lu bricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting. X X X X

Rotate tires. X X

Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-rect stowage.

X X

Lu bricate tie rod end links. X X X X


Change rear axle flu id . X

Change front axle fluid . X

Change 6-spd manual transmission (G-56)fluid.


Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.

X



8

M

A

I

N

T

E

N

AN

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

LE

S



Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,00

(Kilometers) (169 000) (174 000) (179 000) (183 00


Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required.

X

Drain and refill automatic tranmission fluidand change main sump and spin-on coolerreturn filter (if equipped) [545RFE only].

Flush and replace engine coolant at 120months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170000 km).

* This ap plies only if the vehicle is u sed for frequenttrailer towing, snow plowing, fleet vehicle or commercial

service.

**This maintenance is recommend, but not required.

Inspection and service should ala malfunction is observed or

ceipts.



Schedule “A”

Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000

(Kilometers) (10 000) (19 000) (29 000)

[Months] [6] [12] [18]

Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X

Lu bricate Front Prop Shaft fitting. X X X

Rotate tires. X X X


X X X


Lu bricate tie rod end links. X X X Inspect brake linings. X



460 SCHEDULE “A”

8

M

A

I

N

T

E

N

AN

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

LE

S



Miles 36,000 42,000 48,000 54,000

(Kilometers) (58 000) (68 000) (77 000) (87 000

[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54]

Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X

Lu bricate Front Prop Shaft fitting. X X X X

Rotate tires. X X X X

Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-rect stowage.

X X X X


Lu bricate tie rod end links. X X X X

Flush and replace engine coolant at 60months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170000 km).

Inspect brake linings. X X

Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.





Miles 72,000 78,000 84,000

(Kilometers) (116 000) (126 000) (135 000)

[Months] [72] [78] [84]

Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X

Lu bricate Front Prop Shaft fitting. X X X

Rotate tires. X X X


X X X







Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if re-quired.


8

M

A

I

N

T

E

N

AN

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

LE

S



Miles 102,000 108,000

(Kilometers) (164 000) (174 000)

[Months] [102] [108]

Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X

Lu bricate Front Prop Shaft fitting. X X

Rotate tires. X X

Check spare tire for p rop er p ressu re and correct stow age. X X


Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at 60months.

X

Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 months, if notreplaced at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).

Lu bricate tie rod end links. X X


Inspect au to tension d rive belt and replace if required . X

Inspect engin e air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.



Miles 102,000 108,000

(Kilometers) (164 000) (174 000)

[Months] [102] [108]


Inspect PCV Valve, rep lace as necessary.**

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime

a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-

ceipts.

**This maintenance is recommend, but not required.

WARNIN

You can be badly injured w

motor vehicle. D o only that s

you have the knowledge and t

you have any doubt about yo

service job, take your vehic

chanic.


8

M

A

I

N

T

E

N

AN

C

E

S

C

H

E

D

U

LE

S



IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTAN

CONTENTS

Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . .466

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . .469

Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469

Reporting Safety Defects . . .

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . .

Publication Order Forms . . .

Department Of Transportatio

Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . .

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . .

▫ Temperature Grades . . . .



SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FORYOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you’re having w arranty w ork don e, be sure to have theright papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

w o rk t o b e p er fo rm ed m a y n ot b e co ver ed b y t he

warranty, discuss add itional charges w ith the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or thespecific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With RequesIf you list a number of items,

vehicle by the end of the day, d

the service advisor and list the iAt many dealers you may obt

minimal d aily charge. If you ne

to make these arrangements w

pointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCEThe man ufacturer and its dealer

your satisfaction. We want yo

products and services.

Wa rr an ty se rv ice m u st b e d

Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer.

that you take your vehicle to y

know you an d y our veh icle best

t hat you get pr om pt and hi

manufacturer’s dealers have the

466 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE



technicians, special tools, and the latest information to

assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely

manner.

This is w hy you should always talk to your dealer’sservice m anager first. Most matters can be resolved w ith

this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the dealership. They

want to know if you need assistance.

• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you

may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.Any commu nication to the Manufacturer’s Customer

Center should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Dealership name

• Vehicle identification numbe

• Vehicle d elivery date and mi

DaimlerChrysler Motors CorpoP.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 992-1997

DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. C

P.O. Box 1621

Wind sor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone —(800) 465–2001

In Mexico contact:Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Re

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729

Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248

IF YOU NEED CON



Customer As sist ance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer

Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States can commu nicate w ith the

manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for your

vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-pected repairs after your manu facturer’s new vehicle

limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-

hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you

purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will

receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card

in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle d elivery

date. I f you have any ques tions about your s er vice

contract, call the manu facturer

tional Customer Hotline at 1-800

The m anufacturer will not st

contract that is not the manufactuis not responsible for any servic

manu facturer’s Service Contra

service contract that is not a

Contract, and you require servic

er’s new vehicle limited warran

your contract docum ents, and co

those d ocuments.

We appreciate that you have mwh en you p urchased you r new

also made a major investmen

training to assure that you are a

your own ership experience. You

sincere efforts to resolve any w

concerns.




WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and

provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to

this vehicle.

MOPAR PARTSMopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from y our dealer. They will help you keep you r

vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTSIn the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you

believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could causea crash or cause injury or death, you should immed iately

inform the National H ighway Traffic Safety Ad ministra-

tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it find s th at a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. H owever, NHTSA ca

individual problems between y

manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may eiHo tline toll free at 1–888–327

9153), or go to http:/ / ww w.N

NH TSA, U.S. Dep t. of Transpo

20590. You can also obtain oth er

vehicle safety from the Hotline

In Canada:If you believe that your vehicle

should contact the Customer Sediately. Canadian customers wh

defect to the Canadian gover

Transport Canada, Motor Vehic

and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Roa

3V9.

IF YOU NEED CON

O O



PUBLICATION ORDER FORMSTo order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone num bers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer m ailing your payment, p lease call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).

• Service Manuals.

These comprehensive service manuals provide the

information th at stud ents and professional techniciansneed in d iagnosing/ troubleshooting, problem solving,

maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler

Corporation vehicles. A complete working know ledge

of the vehicle, system, and/ or components is written

in straightforward language with illustrations, d ia-

grams, and charts.

• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.

Filled with diagrams, charts a

these practical manuals make

technicians to find and fix controlled v ehicle systems a

exactly how to find and corre

using step-by-step troublesh

procedures, proven diagnosti

of all tools and equipment.

• Owner’s Manuals.

These manuals have been p reof service an d engineering sp

with specific Chrysler grou

starting, operating, emergen

cedu res as well as specific

safety tips.


IF YOU NEED CON



Call Toll Free at:

• 1–800–890–4038 (U .S.)

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

Or

Visit us on the World Wide Web at:

• w w w.techauthority.daimlerchrysl er.com

• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADESThe following describes the tire grading categories estab-

lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s

manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall

of the tires on your car.

All Passenger Car Tires Must C

Requirements in Addition to Th

Treadwear

The treadwear grad e is a compawear rate of the tire when teste

ditions on a specified governm

ample, a tire graded 150 woul

1/ 2) times as well on the gov

graded 100. The relative perfo

upon the actual conditions of

may d epart significantly from th

in d riving h abits, service practic

characteristics and climate.

Traction GradesThe traction grades, from highes

and C. Those grad es represent t

wet p avement as m easured und

IF YOU NEED CON




on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire mark ed C may have p oor traction p erfor-

mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature GradesThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and it s abilit y t o dis sipate heat w hen t es ted under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level

passenger car tires must meet

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 10

sent higher levels of performan

wheel than the minimum requi

WARNIN

The temperature grade for th

a tire that is properly inflate

Excessive speed, under inflat

ing, either separately or in c

heat buildup and possible tir




INDEX

474 INDEX



Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . 393,417

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Air Cond itioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397,398

Air Cond itioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,397

Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 233

Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,332

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,51

Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,174

Airbag On/ Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,176

Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Alterations/ Mod ifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 404,405,441

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,310

Anti-Theft Security Alarm (The

Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . .

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . .

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Dimming Mirror .

Automatic Transaxle . . . . . .

Interlock System . . . . . . . .


Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . .

Fluid and Filter Changes . .

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . .

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special Additives . . . . . . .

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid)

Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

474 INDEX



Bar, Stabilizer/ Sway System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,409

Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 70

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cab Top Clearance Lights . . .

Calibration, Com pass . . . . . .

Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cap acities, Fluid . . . . . . . . .

Cap s, Filler

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Steering . . . . . . . . .

Radiator (Coolant Pressure)

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Carbon Monoxide Warning . .

Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cassette Tape and Player Maint

Catalytic Converter . . . . . . .

CD (Compact Disc) Player . . .

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . .

Center High Mounted Stop Lig

Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . .

476 INDEX



Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . 177

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,59

Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,66

Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,65

Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,185,193,206,219

Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Clutch Linkage Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Computer, Trip/ Travel . . . . .

Console, Overhead . . . . . . . .

Contra ct, Service . . . . . . . . .

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . .

Add ing Coolant (Antifreeze)

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . .

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . .

Disposal of Used Coolant .

Drain, Flush, and Refill . . .

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .

Points to Remember . . . . .

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . .

Selection of Coolant (Antifree

Temperature Gauge . . . . . .

Cruise Control (Speed Control)

Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Customer Assistance . . . . . .

476 INDEX



Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,154

Defroster, Windsh ield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,229,232

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Dipsticks

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Driving

Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . .

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric Rear Window Defrost

Electrical Power Outlets . . . .

Electronic Speed Control (Cruis

Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . .

Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck

Hazard Warning Flasher . .

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jum p Starting . . . . . . . . . . Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . .

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emission Control System Maint

Emission Related Components

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . .

478 INDEX



Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Compar tment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389,441,442

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,441

Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,339,403

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,402,403

Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . .

Flashers

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . .

Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .

Flooded Engine Starting . . . .

Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . .

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transmission . . Power Steering . . . . . . . . .

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine

Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . .

Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . .

Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . .

8



Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335,442

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335,441

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink ) . . . . . . . . . . . 139Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,385

Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Coolant Temp erature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .

Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gear Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Information . . . . . .

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . .

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . .

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .

GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Han ds-Free Ph one (UConnect™Hazard Warning Flasher . . . .

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . .

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . .

High Beam/ Low Beam Selec

Lights On Reminder . . . . .

480 INDEX



Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,154

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

High Beam/ Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 124

Hitches

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 139

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Cables (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13

Wiring System (Spark Plug Wires) . . . . . . . . . . 393

Ignition Key Removal . . . . .

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . .

Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . .

Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . .

Inside Rearview Mirror . . . .

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . .

Instrument Panel and Controls

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning

Integrated Power Module (Fuse

Interior Appearance Care . . .

Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . .

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wip

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . .

Jum p Starting . . . . . . . . . . .

Key, Replacement . . . . . . . .



Key, Sentry (Imm obilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Lap/ Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . 62

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,164

Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,174

Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178,310

Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430,431

Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . 177

Courtesy/ Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Daytime Running . . . . . . .

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Four-Wheel Drive Indicator

Hazard Warning Flasher . .

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . .

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . .

High Beam Indicator . . . . .

High Beam/ Low Beam Selec

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . .

Instrument Cluster . . . . . .

Intensity Control . . . . . . . .

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights On Reminder . . . . .

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . .

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission Warning . . . .

482 INDEX



Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123,173,431,434

Warning (Instrum ent Cluster Description) . . . . . 173

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,411

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Lower Anchors an d Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . 62

Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Maintenance Procedures . . . .

Maintenance Schedule . . . . .

Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . .

Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . .

Malfunction Indicator Light (Ch

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . .

Manu al Transmission . . . . . .

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . .

Lubricant Selection . . . . . .

Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . .

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Dimming . . . . .

Electric Pow ered . . . . . . . Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .

Mod ifications/ Alterations, Vehi

Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Multi-Displacement Engine Sys



Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Noise ControlMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Tampering Prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,418

Noise Emission Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Occup ant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,180

Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,180Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389,442

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . .

Identification Logo . . . . . .

Materials Added to . . . . . . Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . .

Recommendation . . . . . . .

Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Onboard Diagnostic System . .

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLin

Operating Precautions . . . . .

Outside Rearview Mirrors . . Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . .

Overhead Console . . . . . . . .

Overhead Travel Information C

Owner’s Manual (Operator Ma

484 INDEX



Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Passenger Airbag On/ Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Phone, Han ds-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 318

Positive Crankcase Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Power

Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 148Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,398

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Power Wagon Features . . . . .

Pregnant Women and Seat Belt

Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Programm able Electronic FeatuProgramming Transmitters

(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . .

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure

Radio Broadcast Signals . . . .

Radio, N avigation . . . . . . . .

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . Radio Remote Controls . . . . .

Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . .

Ramp Travel Index . . . . . . . .

Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . .

Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . .



Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Recreational Towin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Shifting into Transfer Case N eutral (N) . . . . . . . 361

Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 362

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Remind er, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Remote Soun d System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 224

Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,65

Ride Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle

Safety Defects, Reporting . . .

Safety Information, Tire . . . .

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . .

Satellite Radio Antenna . . . .

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . .

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . .

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . .

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adjustable Upper Shoulder A

And Pregnant Women . . . Child Restraint . . . . . . . . .

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . .

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

486 INDEX



Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,176

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 404,442

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,185,193,206,219

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Manu al Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Transfer Case, Shifting into T

Case N eutral (N) . . . . . .

Transfer Case, Shifting out of

Case N eutral (N) . . . . . .

Shoulder Belt Upper AnchorageShoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . .

Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . .

Skid Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sliding Rear Window

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Slippery Surfaces, Driving On

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spark Plug Wires (Ignition Cabl

Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speed Control (Cruise Control)



Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Stabilizer Bars, Electronic Disconn ecting . . . . . . . . 79

Stabilizer/ Sway Bar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Manu al Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Starting Procedu res (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Steering

Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,398Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .

Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . .

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sup plemental Tire Pressure Info

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . System, Navigation . . . . . . .

System, Remote Starting . . . .

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tether Anchor, Child Restraint

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . .

Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire and Loading Information P

Tire Identification Number (TIN

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire Safety Information . . . . .

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . .

488 INDEX



Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,319

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,322

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tread Wear Indicators . . . .

Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . .

Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . Tongu e Weight/ Trailer Weight

Torque Converter Clutch . . .

Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . .

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .

Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .

Cooling System Tips . . . . .

Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Minimum Requirements . .

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

TransaxleAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Transmission

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,412

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245,255,412

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink ) . . 139

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Trip Odom eter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,180

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UConnect™ (Hands-Free Ph one

Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . .

Uniform Tire Quality Grad es . Universal Transmitter . . . . . .

Variance, Compass . . . . . . . .

Vehicle Identification Number (

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle M od ifications/ Alteratio

Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . .

Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning Lights (Instrum ent Clu

Warnings and Cautions . . . .

Warranty Information . . . . . .

Washers, Windshield . . . . . .

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .

490 INDEX



Wheel Alignm ent an d Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Wheel Flares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,374

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,289

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,148

Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Windshield Defroster . . . . . .

Windshield Washers . . . . . . .

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield Wiper Blades . . .

Wind shield Wipers . . . . . . . . Wiper Blade Replacement . . .

Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . .

Wiring, Ignition (Spark Plug W

YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning



81-326-0724 First Edition

2007 ram powerwagon owners manual

Documents